Home

ERZ 2000 Operating Instructions

1. Pipeline Pipeline Wider Ranges Ouality Gas Ouality Gas of lt 10MPa lt 12MPa Application Value Min Max Min Max Min Max Unit Ho 30 45 0 30 45 0 20 48 0 MJ m3 T 263 338 0 263 338 0 225 350 0 K p 0 10 0 0 12 0 0 65 0 Mpa dv 0 55 80 0 0 55 80 0 0 55 90 0 Methan 70 100 0 70 100 0 50 100 0 Mol Pao N2 0 50 0 0 20 0 0 50 0 Mol CO2 0 23 0 0 20 0 0 30 0 Mol Ethan 0 13 0 0 10 0 0 20 0 Mol Propan 0 6 0 0 3 5 0 5 0 Mol uS H20 0 0 015 0 0 015 0 0 015 Mol H2S 0 0 02 0 0 02 0 0 02 Mol 2 0 10 0 0 10 0 0 10 0 Mol CO 0 3 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 Mol 02 0 0 02 0 0 02 0 0 02 Mol 0 1 5 0 1 5 0 1 5 Mol N Butan 0 1 5 0 1 5 0 1 5 Mol l Pentan 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 0 5 Mol N Pentan 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 0 5 Mol Hexan 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Mol Heptan 0 0 05 0 0 05 0 0 05 Mol Oktan 0 0 05 0 0 05 0 0 05 Mol Nonan 0 0 05 0 0 05 0 0 05 Mol Dekan 0 0 05 0 0 05 0 0 05 Mol Helium 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 0 5 Mol Argon 0 0 02 0 0 02 0 0 02 Mol CC10 AGA range The value indicates which quality range of the AGA8DC92 equation of state is currently active Three ranges are defined in ISO 12213 1 Pipeline Ouality Gas 10 MPa 2 Pipeline Ouality Gas 12 MPa 3 Wider Ranges of Application If the current operating condit
2. EEEE ERK 169 A 38 FG NE rA c 169 A 39 FD GOrrectOr CY ClO MR 169 A 40 FE Calibration unit standard density gross calorific value 170 A 41 FF Function test under running conditions essen eene nennen 170 A 42 FG Hardware CI 173 A 43 FH Ultrasonic flow meter 15 nennen nennen nennen 175 A 44 FI recul 177 A 45 B BIETET TT 177 A 46 FL Ultrasonic profile of velocities 177 A 47 GA WIEDER 178 A 48 GB Flow rate 180 49 eed areo E e M 181 A 50 GD Determination of characteristic ieeeese eee eese esses eene enne 182 A 51 GE Error curve linearization forward flow esses 182 A 52 COFION onsas a 184 A 53 GH Start up and slow down monitoring cesses eene enne nennen 184 A 54 pilo 184 A 55 GM REYMOIdS COMFECTIOMN Rm 185 A 56 GN BaSe COMeCtOM S 186 A 57 GO Ente Curve COMO CH OM E 186 A 58 GP Sur Reel M 187 A 59 GU Namur Sensor essen ee einen ne
3. 210 79 JB Message ESAE UI 211 80 E 211 81 KB Time contact signal to external 213 A 82 lurida 214 A 83 LB Totalizer billing mode 1 216 A 84 LJ Totalizer undefined billing 217 A 85 LK Counter parameter eee erts Pene ERE 218 A 86 LL Monitoring of synchronous run sessssessseseeeeee eene 219 A 87 LN Original totalizer encoder totalizer terminal X4 or 9 219 A 88 LO Digital totalizer transmission ultrasonic flow meter 220 A 89 EP Setting TotallZeES FERRE ERE Rao QURE 221 A 90 ES Hourly quantitl8s eee 223 A 91 LT D ily quarntltles ee 224 92 LU Quantity weighted average values essen eene nnne 224 A 93 MB Current output 1 terminal X4 1 4 2 225 A 94 MF Pulse output 1 terminal X3 1 X3 2 227 A 95 MJ Contact output 1 terminal X1 1 1 2 228 A 96 MR Frequency output channel 1 terminal X2 7 2 8 229 A 97 NA Current input 1 termi
4. 4 eene eene 26 3 2 2 How to change over measured values to another 27 3 2 3 Activating inputs and or outputs 0 0 lees ccestneceeseeeeecesnaeeceseaeeceseaeeceeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeanees 27 3 2 4 Information about parameters for the volume at measurement conditions 28 3 2 5 Information about operating the device as an ERZ 2000 34 3 2 6 Information about operating the device as orifice plate flowcomputer ERZ 2014 2114 2012 2112 35 3 2 7 Information about pressure eene nennen 42 CONTENTS 3 2 8 Information about temperature nennen eene 43 3 2 9 Information about the coefficient gas quality sees 45 3 2 10 Information about the ID display nennen ener 46 3 2 11 Information about test functions ce eeseeccceeseeceeeeeeeceseaeeceeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeceesaaaeeees 46 3 2 12 Information about inputs and 47 3 2 13 REVISION SWItCh De una 49 3 2 14 Error curve linearization for volume measurement essent 51 3 3 Special instructions and operating 53 3 3 1 Linking extra counters
5. 242 B 2 For devices with MID approval ecsecccssssecceseseceesesececeesnceceesaececesaeeeceseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaees 248 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Introduction 1 1 Overview of functions The ERZ 2000 is a further development of the proven ERZ 9000T concept Just like the ERZ 9000 the ERZ 2000 consists of two functional groups The base module provides data logging all inputs and outputs all interfaces and manual operation via the front panel The actual calculations and corrector functions are managed by the second module which is the arithmetic logic unit ALU It is an embedded PC with a high 1 performance CPU Thus the device is capable of making even more complex calculations with short computing cycles The base module is used for neutral measurements of all inputs similar to a multimeter but no calculations or assignments to physical units are made Therefore the base module only deals with analog values frequencies and meter contents without knowing the meaning of the individual values The measured values are transmitted to the arithmetic logic unit where they are assigned to the appropriate physical quantities and converted into usable data The base module also operates all outputs and the data interfaces Another task is reading the keys and outputting texts and results on the display For hardware extensions and future requirements there are three spare slots The arithmetic logic unit
6. A 63 HG Mass flow rate broken down into components gt o o o o s En 09 5 5 lt e c 5 The mass flow rate of each individual gas component can also be calculated because the components are known A 64 HNPath 1 _ Access Line Name Value Unit Display and parameterization of details for puppe idi 3 Genuine velocity 0 000 m s 5 Measurem Quality OS 0 00000 m s lt ALTE 15 1 16 down 1 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 A 65 IA TCP IP Net work Important settings for networking devices and operation using the browser Access Line Designation Value Unit 191 A 65 1 Setting the parameters The necessary TCP IP settings must be configured in the column IA so that the network connection functions correctly Access Column Line Name Minimum Maximum Unit Remarks B IA 1 Separate IP4 address unlimited unlimited none B 1 2 HTTP port 0 65535 none B 1 6 Host name unlimited unlimited none B 1 7 Domain suffix unlimited unlimited none B 1 13 Net mask unlimited unlimited none B 1 14 Gateway unlimited unlimited none B 1 15 DHCP Menu none no yes B 1 16 Inactive timeout 0s 3600 s 5 B IA 17 Data timeout Os 3600 s S B 1 19 Max block size 512 bytes 2048 bytes byte B IA 21 DNS unlimited unlimited none A 65 2 Explanation of the settings Important data is marked
7. RMG MESSTECHNIK GMBH 246 Cover base plate seal diagram ERZ 2004 gas volume corrector with ET 2000 data logger ERZ 2104 superior calorific value corrector with ET 2000 data logger ERZ 2002 density corrector with ET 2000 data logger ERZ 2102 superior calorific value corrector with ET 2000 data logger Z Nr 058236 4 Eckert Date 03 09 04 Status 28 04 06 ANNEX 247 x o o ojx 0 0 0 Locking 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000008 0000000000 o m 5 o a CHOON o OU AUN A WH lt 0000000000 ojo000000000 0 Locking seal o o So So 9o COM1 COM2 COM3 24VDC Si 2At 90 230VAC Si 1A Ethernet 5 5 6 5 c 2 5 KS Cover base plate seal diagram ERZ 2004 gas volume corrector with ET2000 data logger Ru 090235 4 RMG MESSTECHNIK GMBH ERZ 2104 superior calorific value corrector with ET2000 data logger Date 03 09 04 ss ERZ 2002 density corrector with ET2000 data logger Status 01 09 06 ERZ 2102 superior calorific value corrector with ET2000 data logger ANNEX th MID approval ices wi For dev B 2 RMG Messtechnik O Netz O Messung O Warnung O Alarm o o e V Drahtplombe Betrieb Eingabe lead seal FLOW COMPUTER SYSTEM ERZ 2004 Der cH 1 2
8. off The relevant temperature correction is deactivated linear The correction factors GAO3 T crr fact orifice and GA04 T crr fact pipe are calculated using the linear heat expansion coefficients GAO5 Lin expanse orifice and Lin expanse pipe T Ber fakt 1 Alin Temp 20 Material selection The correction factors GAO3 T crr fact orifice and GAO4 T crr fact pipe are calculated using an approximation equation and the coefficients A and B T Ber fakt 21 A Temp 20 Temp 20 10 Coefficients are assigned automatically when a material is selected The permitted temperature range for the materials listed extends from 200 C to 600 C with the exception of copper nickel and brass which have an upper limit of 500 C The correction is made according to the GOST 8 586 regulations for the measurement of liquids and gases flow rate and quantity by means of orifice instruments 8 586 1 Part 1 Principle of the method of measurements and general requirements 8 586 2 Part 2 Orifice plates Technical requirements 8 586 5 Part 5 Measurement procedure The calculation uses three coefficients a0 a1 and a2 in line with the materials used for the orifice and pipe coordinates GA 12 17 The procedure is complex and the description would extend beyond the 180 boundaries of this device manual Therefore refer to the documents listed above for further details _ A 48 Flow rate parameters
9. The relevant applicable approval approval mark is specified on the type plate The related seal diagrams form either part of this manual or the approval documents A temperature transmitter used for types ERZ 2004 or ERZ 2104 approved according to MID should be secured as follows A security seal is affixed to the main plate Security seals are used to connect the detachable cover on the electronics housing to fixed parts of the housing to prevent access to the calibration lock which is set to write protect during normal operation In MID terms fuel gas value correction in the ERZ 2104 calculation of the energy and energy totalizers in each totalizer set is an integrated function but is not subject to MID However the function has been certified as part of the national approval procedure for the ERZ 2104 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 Getting started operation 2 1 System overview Nd FLOW COMPUTER SYSTEM ERZ 2000 Power Run Warn Alarm s a 9 Lock Unlock Select Alarms o Clear Keys 0 to 9 have more than one function The current function depends on the operating condition In normal display mode the text below the key applies and allows measured values or chapter headings and functions to be directly or indirectly accessed In input mode the text on the key itself applies You can enter numbers and in extended mode also letters Entering letters is similar to the method used for mobi
10. 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 8 Remote control parameterization 3 8 1 Connecting a notebook Apart from operating the device via the front panel there is another very convenient option for operating or parameterizing it either locally or remotely with a PC or notebook Independently of a separate operating software operation can be made using the PC s browser e g Internet Explorer or Netscape The ERZ 2000 operates as the server while the PC operates as a client For local connection without a hub a crossover network cable is required The ERZ 2000 can also included an existing network For more information 63 see separate description E 3 8 2 Setting the addresses To ensure that the network connection functions properly you have to make the necessary settings in the TCP IP Network chapter which you can find under the Communications heading Press lt 0 gt Mode and then four times the Cursor Right key For more information see separate description 3 9 Time system 3 9 1 Quartz clock The time system consists of a battery backed quartz controlled real time clock RTC module which provides the time basis for the ERZ 2000 The clock module can be synchronized by a higher level timing element external synchronization input The internal time basis can be changed via the keyboard or the DSfG interface but only within the scope of the relevant access rights If there is a telephone connection via MO
11. control ys 23 Uncalib Resistance 0 00 O OB Gauge pressure contains the same details as AB Absolute pressure This function is required when a gauge pressure sensor is used instead of the absolute pressure sensor The following operating mode must then be set in AB Absolute pressure from gauge pressure ANNEX The ambient pressure is set here dE Rosemount ANNEX A 104 OD Input values Diagnostic displays zna pDo HEN Unit Value Designation Access Line 236 A 105 OE Miscellaneous Access Line Designation 1 Realtive density 7 Diverse 13 8 State 9 User lock 10 Diverse 1 11 Diverse 2 12 Diverse 3 13 Diverse 4 14 Diverse 5 15 Diverse 6 16 Diverse 7 17 Diverse 8 18 Diverse 9 19 Counting check 1 20 Counting check 2 21 Receipt MOD520 22 Send M32ok 23 Send M32 err Mm 24 Receipt difference 25 Burst telegrams 26 CAN burst 27 freq main 28 freq ref 29 Roughness c 30 Current coordinate 31 Current key 41 Status mom values 42 State 43 Group name A M 44 Group name N Z 45 Diverse 10 47 Current entity 48 Current address 49 Aux Value string 50 Aux value long VU o Bate o o 51 Lastevent Value 0 6459 Region Offline 0 Designation Data type Parameterization Load defaults Setta
12. Terminal 4 Transistor output 2 5 Transistor output 3 Terminal Transistor output 3 Terminal 7 Transistor output 4 Terminal 8 Transistor output 4 Terminal 9 Alarm contact polarized solid state relay closed if de energized Terminal 10 Alarm contact polarized solid state relay closed if de energized X2 Terminal 1 Transistor output 5 Terminal 2 Transistor output 5 Terminal 3 Transistor output 6 Terminal 4 Transistor output 6 Terminal 5 Transistor output 7 Terminal Transistor output 7 Terminal 7 Frequency output higher priority or transistor output 8 Terminal 8 Frequency output higher priority or transistor output 8 Terminal 9 Transistor output warning Terminal 10 Transistor output warning X3 Terminal 1 Pulse output 1 Dispatcher or totalizer pulses Terminal 2 Pulse output 1 Dispatcher or totalizer pulses Terminal 3 Pulse output 2 Dispatcher or totalizer pulses Terminal 4 Pulse output 2 Dispatcher or totalizer pulses Terminal 5 Pulse output 3 Dispatcher or totalizer pulses Terminal 6 Pulse output Dispatcher or totalizer pulses Terminal 7 Pulse output 4 Dispatcher or totalizer pulses Terminal 8 Pulse output 4 Dispatcher or totalizer pulses Terminal 9 Spare 2 Input for Vo with external isolating device Terminal 10 Spare 2 Input for Vo with external isolating device 117 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS X4 Terminal Current output 1 Terminal Current outpu
13. measure the volume via the HF inputs Q 3 Time stamp 2 DON because the test function is 01 01 1970 0 synchronized with the volume frequency _ pue emo measurement The testing time for a 5 Time stamp 4 01 01 1970 0 slow inputs such as interfaces with an Enco or ultrasound meter must be Q 6 Revision run 30 S sufficiently long to minimize resolution 1 errors 1000 seconds This also applies Q 7 Pre post run 5 for the On the fly calibration function Q 8 Delay 0 S B 9 Partner address OFF B 10 Partners entity Flow comp entity A function on the device simplifies testing procedures by identifying and documenting all the most important data involved in a testing procedure Information on the functional test function can be found in the section Test under key 6 The following parameters appear there Status indicates the current status of the function inactive active Time stamp 1 parameter for the start of the testing procedure prestart stage Time stamp 2 parameter for the end of the prestart stage and the start of the actual test Time stamp 3 parameter for the end of the test stage and the start of the follow up stage Time stamp 4 parameter for the end of the follow up stage and the function Testing time parameter that gives a relative indication of the testing time corresponds to the time between time stamp 3 and 4 Prestart follow up time parameter that gives a relative indication of the prestart an
14. Archive Directly accesses archives and by pressing the Cursor Left key maximum values 6 Test Accesses test functions such as On the fly calibration Freeze Functional test etc 9 Totalizer Accesses the data of the flow meter 0 Mode Accesses general settings t ID Displays ID data electronic type plate Select Displays the currently selected chapter 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 1 3 The special case of the lt 0 gt Mode key If you press lt 0 gt Mode the display will jump to the Mode heading in the centre of the coordinate system and the select arrow will point to Base values Mode gt Base values Billing mode Access From here you have two options for proceding further on You can press either the Cursor Down key to access all chapters under the Mode heading which have something to do with operating modes device settings base values etc or you can press the Cursor Right or Left key to scroll through the whole system on the heading level As soon as you have reached the desired position select the relevant chapter by moving the select arrow gt When the arrow is located on the desired chapter press Enter to jump into this chapter onto the first active function line 3 2 General information 3 2 1 How to change over totalizers to another unit Press 7 Totalizer to access the overview The standard setting of Vm and Vb totalizers is m with nine digits being displayed
15. Connect screen on rear panel of device to terminal strip 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 11 2 5 Wiring examples standard assignments 11 2 5 1 Input of pressure transmitter Current input passive transmitter ERZ 2000 Connector Transmitter X5 T 1 1 1 1 1 Current input active e g 4 to 20mA ERZ 2000 Connector Transmitter X5 11 2 5 2 Input of resistance thermometer PT 100 ERZ 2000 Connector Resistance thermometer X5 X 5 7 3 100 ohms 125 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Spare inputs active passive e g differential pressure sensor ERZ 2000 Connector Transmitter X5 X6 passive active passive active 126 11 2 5 3 Input of density transducer of type DG08 Subrack with ERZ 2000 Freely assignable explosion protected Frequency DG 08 to connectors X8 amplifier and X9 Freely assignable to connectors X5 and X6 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 11 2 5 4 Input of standard density transducer of type NDG 08 Subrack with ERZ 2000 Freely assignable explosion protected Frequency NDG 08 to connectors X8 amplifier measuring transducer and X9 127 Freely assignable I to connectors X8 Frequency NDG 08 and X9 reference transducer E The frequency inputs 5 6 7 and 8 are multiplexed by the system Therefore make sure that the transducers are connected without interruption i e in sequence 11 2 5 5 Input of velocity of sound transduce
16. HART 2 status reports trouble HART 3 status reports trouble HART 4 status reports trouble HART 5 status reports trouble HART 6 status reports trouble HART 9 status reports trouble HART 10 status reports trouble HART 11 status reports trouble HART 12 status reports trouble Maximum deviation at operating point exceeded IGM invalid substitute value used Number of path failure s greater than allowed AGA8 range violation Loss of viscosity Viscosity below lower alarm limit Viscosity exceeds upper alarm limit Viscosity below lower warning limit Viscosity exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization viscosity Viscosity gradient exceeds maximum Path 1 measurement quality less as demanded Path 2 measurement quality less as demanded Path 3 measurement quality less as demanded Path 4 measurement quality less as demanded Path 5 measurement quality less as demanded Path 6 measurement quality less as demanded Path 7 measurement quality less as demanded Path 8 measurement quality less as demanded Path 1 communication quality less as demanded Path 2 communication quality less as demanded Path 3 communication quality less as demanded Path 4 communication quality less as demanded N N N N N N N N NY NY NNN NY NNNNNNNNN H KH a S Se S M M No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No Yes Yes Ye
17. HF input of the measuring channel volume Frequency inputs 8 CHARACTERISTIC DATA Specifications of the corrector 0 4 to 25 mA 20 bits 2 5V 2500 20 ppm 50 ms 6 8 V PT 100 4 conductor design 20 C to 60 C 0 01 C 0 05 C 50 ms The permissible measuring range of volume frequency is in the range from 0 1 Hz to 6 kHz The accuracy is 0 01 Hz Uhys 1V Utrg 3V Overvoltage protection 6 8 V with external module 18 V with internal module electrically isolated HF input of reference channel volume The permissible measuring range of volume frequency is in the range from 0 1 Hz to 6 kHz The accuracy is 0 01 Hz Uhys 1V Utrg 3V Overvoltage protection 6 8 V with external module 18 V with internal module electrically isolated 8 1 3 HF input volume input Counting inputs The permissible HF volume counting range starts at 0 1 Hz and extends to 6 kHz The input has been designed with two channels LF volume input The permissible LF volume counting range starts at 0 Hz and extends to 6 kHz The input has been designed with two channels 95 8 CHARACTERISTIC DATA Input for the digital Vo totalizer Data transmission between the gas meter and the volume corrector is made in one direction and in a non reactive way from the gas meter to the volume corrector The electrical characteristic data comply with DIN 19234 NAMUR 8 1 4 Other inputs 96 Digital status inputs All inputs are el
18. gt Temperature measurements continue to be taken for correction ED 15 Live value gt Pressure measurements continue to be taken for correction Or ED 14 Retained value gt Temperature measurements are being retained for correction The measured value for revision can be seen in coordinate AC 24 base value ED 15 Retained value gt Pressure measurements are being retained for correction The measured value for revision can be seen in coordinate AB 24 base value NOTE Limit monitoring is deactivated but all hardware monitoring features such as open circuit 06 monitoring etc will remain active and will impact the base value The retained value will not be affected hereby 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 2 14 Error curve linearization for volume measurement Error curve linearization The error curve linearization of the gas meter can optionally be performed using two different methods a Error curve linearization with polynomial related to the flow rate Correction is made using a quartic polynomial which reproduces the error curve of the gas meter as a function of the flow rate 51 Error equation E A 2 QVm 2 A 1 OQVm 1 A0 A 1 OVm A2 OVm2 EE E Deviation of the error curve OVm Volumetric flow rate at measurement conditions m3 h An Constants KV Constant meter factor The polynomial coefficients An n 2 to n 2 are calculated from the measured value pairs error Ei and f
19. 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 9 13 0 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 9 19 0 19 1 19 2 19 3 19 4 19 5 19 9 30 0 31 9 32 0 32 1 32 2 32 3 32 4 32 5 32 6 32 7 33 0 33 1 33 2 33 3 33 4 33 5 35 0 35 1 35 2 35 3 35 4 35 5 35 6 35 7 36 0 36 1 36 2 36 3 36 4 VSB jump VSB I warn lim VSB gt up warn lim VSB param error Pg loss Pg l alarm lim Pg gt up alarm lim Pg jump Pg l warn lim Pg gt up warn lim Pg param error N2 loss N2 lt l alarm lim N2 gt up alarm lim N2 jump N2 lt l warn lim N2 gt up warn lim N2 param error Malloc error CAN fault CAN overflow BM failure CRC 12 error GC syntax GC comm Overheating Undercooling V d Waals alarm Bill Mod undef Billing mode 1 Billing mode 2 Billing mode 3 Billing mode 4 DSfG freeze Oven T gt gt high carrier gas response fakt Chrom base Oven temp carrier gas Chrom peak GC service raw sum retention time autocalibr fieldwork GC6000 VSB gradient exceeds maximum VSB below lower warning limit VSB exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization VSB Loss of gauge pressure Gauge pressure below lower alarm limit Gauge pressure exceeds upper alarm limit Gauge pressure gradient exceeds maximum Gauge pressure below lower warning limit Gauge press
20. 5 A n OE o gt gt 5 Oo Fe EHE 3 EERE A 6 AG Density Access Line Designation Value Unit The typical setting here for ERZ 2002 AS 1 Measured value 35 000 kg m3 or 2102 AS 2 Input value gt AGO5 35 000 Kg select RMG density i i 5 Default 35 000 kg m3 6 Lower warning limit 0 100 kg m3 Upper warning limit 60 000 kg m3 0 100 60 000 340 ul Select the correct frequency input here e g from frequency 5 to 8 frequencies 5 6 7 8 are measurements with a higher resolution D 24 Base value D 25 Mean for DSfG AS 26 Uncorrected Current status DSfG status e is N N co N 35 000 kg m3 35 000 kg m3 35 000 kg m3 Stop Stop 0 000 kg m3 D G8 30 Format BF 29 Used range 31 Min drag indicator 32 drag indicator 33 Current gradient 34 Second mean 35 Minute mean 36 Hourly mean 37 Ongoing mean 38 Standard deviation 47 Revision mean f pez qe ques qim pues pu ie i 48 Retain value 35 000 kg m3 35 000 kg m3 0 000 kg m3 s 35 000 kg m3 35 000 kg m3 35 000 kg m3 35 000 kg m3 0 000 kg m3 35 000 kg m3 35 000 kg m3 145 The structure of the following menus is similar AH Density sensor temperature Al VOS temperature AJ Velocity of operating noise AK Standard velocity of sound AL Device temperature AM Viscosity AN Isentropic exponent AO Joule Thomson coefficient AP Effective pr
21. P o o Designation Value 50 000 40 000 11000 000 Creeping quantity limit Definition of the flow rate limit value below which a totalizer calculation should not take place 100 0 for natural gas 12 500 accumulate r HF2 K 1 1 50 10 This parameter is used to determine whether creeping quantity suppression is active or whether the accumulated quantities should be added together Function of these parameters same as ERZ 9000T See manual for more detailed description aM 10000 4 000 Auxiliary displays for diagnosing problems with HF measurement and comparison sensor signals The actual device uses the K factors to calculate the ideal number of pulses for paddle wheel monitoring Number of tests for determining which is the better HF channel Indicates how many changes have already taken place The alarm output on external volume sensors can be connected The contact input must be selected here The warning output on external volume sensors can be connected The contact input must be selected here 40 Sourve vol alarm Q 55 Freq Turbinesim a Sa ES 92 0 gt gt A 49 GC kv factor Pulse values currently used may deviate from line 2 e g after characteristic correction Access Line Designation Valu
22. The RS 485 COM 4 interface provides central access to the DSfG bus for all entities available in the device If there is more than one entity each entity has its own bus address although there is only one physical access to the bus An exception to this is the master which is assigned to the COM 3 interface Visualization is performed jointly for all functional modules The function keys and the display are available to the various entities 1 INTRODUCTION 1 5 Commercial use The ERZ 2000 system is available in different variants approved for commercial use custody transfer application in Germany as well as other countries The following domestic design approvals apply for Germany ERZ 2004 State flow corrector approval mark 7 741 04 56 LENS ERZ 2104 Fuel gas value flow corrector approval mark 7 743 04 16 5 ERZ 2002 Density flow corrector approval mark 7 742 04 08 iE ERZ 2102 Fuel gas value flow corrector with direct density measurement approval mark 7 743 06 17 ERZ 2114 2112 Differential pressure gas meter approval mark 7 543 07 10 An EC type examination certificate is available for the European Union according to Directive 2004 22 EC MID Module B ERZ 2004 pTZ Volume Conversion Device acc EN 12405 1 certificate no DE 11 MIO02 PTBO0O3 ERZ 2104 pTZ Volume Conversion Device acc EN 12405 1 with Additional Function Energy Conversion Device acc EN 12405 2 certificate no 1 1 002
23. When you press the 0 key the ERZ 2000 will jump to table E and display the first chapter Base values and the following chapters which can be browsed through using the Cursor Up or Down key When you browse through the chapters an arrow appearing in front of the chapter selected is used for orientation Press Enter to access the functions of the chapter to which the arrow points Starting from the central point table E which you access by pressing the Mode key you can easily browse through all tables from the beginning to the end P using the Cursor Right or Left key 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION The lt gt Select key fulfils an important function as it helps you orient yourself in the coordinate system and select the desired chapter Using this key you can switch back from any location in the coordinate system to the current chapter with heading etc If you press the lt gt key once again you are referred back to the function coordinate where you came from Whenever the device shows a view with a chapter heading you can access all chapters of the entire system by pressing the Cursor Right or Left key When you have reached the desired chapter 8 heading press the Cursor Up or Down key to access the chapter or press Enter to activate the function If you are inside a chapter i e in a column of the table with the functions you can also browse through all chapters of the complete coordinate system
24. alarm lim Vb P T Rb or Rn bit8 direction lower value bit bit9 revision bit10 parameter change bit11 malfunction fuel gas value bit12 malfunction carbon dioxide bit13 malfunction original totalizer bit14 replacement bit15 direction higher value bit internal device documentation contains a complete data element list for the corrector entity of the ERZ 2000 see Documentation ll DSfG 1 Data elements a Corrector A 68 1 DSfG entity recording Access Line Designation Value Unit NN B 3 Service request 999999999 B 4 AG 10 visible yes B 5 Identifier AG1 Act B 6 Identifier AG2 AG2 B 7 Identifier AG3 AG3 B 8 Identifier AG4 AGA B 9 Identifier AG7 AGI B 10 Identifier AG8 AGB The setting yes initiates a DSfG freeze B 11 Identifier AG9 AG9 telegram which may be necessary if the m revision switch is missing from a station B 12 Identifier AG10 AG10 without MRG Q 13 Attention Freeze no V ID 01 Rec entity address DSfG address of the recording unit All 30 DSfG slave addresses and the setting off are permitted here The recording unit cannot be parameterized as a control station The recording entity uses interface COMA See C 01 Corrector address for more information ID 03 Service request The fill level indicators for the individual archive groups are checked to identify whether they exceed the numerical value entered here Message H56 4 Service request i e s
25. basis and the volume corrector converts the time into local time For this reason the correct time zone has to be set on the device The selection menu comprises all time zones of the world The time is changed automatically from normal time to daylight saving time and vice versa in accordance with the currently applicable official rules of the time zone set If Europe Berlin has been set for Germany time is changed from CET to CEST on the last Sunday of March at 2 o clock 64 and thus the clock is put forward one hour The time is changed from CEST to CET on the last Sunday of October at 3 o clock and thus the clock is put back one hour 3 9 2 Setting the time and date The time and date are to be set in the Times chapter H Press 0 Mode and then the Cursor Right key until the arrow points to the KA Times chapter Then press Enter to access the Times chapter and make your settings directly at the Date and time function If you want to change the settings manually you will have to open the user lock in any case You can enter the date and time directly via the numerical keyboard After you have pressed Enter the time and or date will be accepted Non permissible inputs will be disregarded 3 9 3 Time synchronizations Apart from the synchronization within a DSfG bus system which is common practice in Germany it is possible to synchronize one or more ERZ 2000s to local time If there is a time server in the network w
26. e Superior calorific value corrector for natural gases Calculation of the K coefficient in accordance with GERG 88 S AGA NX 19 or AGA 8 92DC e Mass computer for pure gases Calculation of the K coefficient in accordance with the Beattie Bridgeman equation for hydrogen nitrogen oxygen air ammonia carbon dioxide helium neon argon methane krypton xenon ethane ethylene acetylene propane and butane Other equation systems can optionally be used As a universal system the device concept provides for the extension or integration of all individual devices of older type series from RMG Messtechnik GmbH Designations and device variants of the ERZ 2000 system family The thousands place describes the system name The hundreds place defines the calculation of energy superior calorific value correction The tens place defines the function of the orifice plate computer The ones place defines the correction of state temperature or density 1 temperature 2 density 3 spare 4 pressure temperature Examples PTZ corrector ERZ 2004 Superior calorific value corrector ERZ 2104 Density corrector ERZ 2002 Density corrector energy ERZ 2102 PTZ corrector with ultrasonic controller ERZ 2004 USC Superior calorific value corrector with ultrasonic controller ERZ 2104 USC Density corrector with ultrasonic controller ERZ 2002 USC Density corrector energy with ultrasonic controller ERZ 2102 USC PTZ corrector with mass calculation
27. first column 01 first line Chapters which belong together are combined under the first letter AA AB AC AD BA BB BC CA CB CC CD In the present documentation the function of a key is indicated in bold Italic typeface e g Enter Totalizer Analysis etc You can directly access an overview of measured values and results if you use the following four keys 1 Meas P T 2 Analysis 7 Totalizer 8 Flow rates Since there are more columns used in the coordinate system than there are keys on the front panel some data can only be accessed indirectly Indirect access is made by selecting the generic term e g by pressing the Meas P T key The 4 line display shows the first four measured values and there is an arrow before the first value in the topmost line in front of the name of the value shown e g Pabs If you now press Enter the display will jump to the Absolute pressure chapter If you then press the Cursor Up or Down key you can browse through the functions coordinates This applies to all values displayed which can be accessed by means of the arrow symbol gt Another option for indirectly accessing data is to select the current chapter by pressing lt gt Select and then the Cursor Right or Left key to browse through all chapters As soon as you have reached the desired chapter heading press the Cursor Up or Down key to access the chapter and press Enter to activate the function Dep
28. 1 9100 mol D 48 Retain value 1 9100 mol ES 50 Manufacturer O Es 1 Deiene ES 52 Serialnumber 0 147 A 10 CC Calculation of K coefficient Access Line Designation Value The K coefficient calculation method incorporated into the custody transfer results is selected here i e the equation selected here is used for correction GC1 GC2 means that the K coefficient method follows the relevant active measuring device if the gas quality connection is redundant Example Main measurement GC with full analysis and K coefficient method according to AGA 8 92 DC Comparative measurement correlative measuring device and K coefficient method according to GERG 88 S If the system switches from the main GC to the comparator device for whatever reason the method for calculating the K coefficient switches automatically from AGA 8 92 DC to GERG 88 S If necessary another billing mode roadway can be selected automatically for this particular case see section EC Billing mode line 4 Bill mode select for setting 148 GERG 88 S boundless gt gt o a es 1 14 O 486 Msg aktive ne 09 AGA check Controls checks of the quality ranges with regard to the AGA 8 92DC conversion factor calculation The required quality range is selected here See the table below
29. 11 The quality of calibration can be assessed by means of the response factors IN GC6000 Gas cylinder and control panel Input fields JN 07 to IN 06 Assigning an input contact for monitoring the minimum limits for pressure and temperature of the calibration gas cylinders and the room temperature of the GC Defining an input contact as calibration contact Fields N 08 to IN 14 Displaying the function linked to an input contact The external control panel has four LEDs visualizing the operation of the GC6000 Fields IN 15 to IN 18 show the status of these LEDs 209 A 78 JA Fault messages Displays current pending active Designation messages at 2 second intervals Messages accumulated since last acknowledgment 210 as alarms as notes D 7 pt 77 E 2 oO Notes RR Setting indicating whether notes are alarms or notes E Activates the fault suppression function EE when flow zero These parameters can be used to modify the reaction of the relevant contact Realtime as before Lo EE Extended change the time in line 24 MN Retained must be deleted manually JA 28 Bits flux control All alarms in the ERZ 2000 are inspected for logical connections and displayed as collective alarms in register 474 and 9118 in a special bit Bit 0 Delta P alarms Bit 1 quality
30. 485 2 reserve interface Terminating resistor ON Additional interface card for pressure and temperature measurement 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS DIL switch for RS 485 2 reserve interface ar terminating resistor ON see b pp 131 TIN 1 b a v 3 a v WEE e DIL switch for RS 485 2 reserve interface terminating resistor iis 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 11 2 5 8 Analog output Example analog output 1 ERZ 2000 Connector X4 pi 132 N 1 lt Load 7000 11 2 5 9 Outputs alarm warning Alarm Warning ERZ 2000 Connector X1 ERZ 2000 Connector X2 Normally closed O contact 11 2 5 10 Pulse outputs 1 to 4 internal wiring as with warning ERZ 2000 Connector X3 1 I l 1 2 3 lod L I gd 2 4 L EM 5 dg 3 IER 7 ro 4 8 a im 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 11 3 DSfG bus 11 3 1 DSfG connector pin assignments To connect the device to the DSfG bus there is a 9 pin male Cannon connector COM 4 available on the rear panel of the device Pin assignments 1 5 connectable DIP switch 133 GND connectable via DIP switch RDA TDA unassigned GND connectable via DIP switch unassigned GND connectable via DIP switch TDB RDB unassigned IQ po Oy OT ex GND and 5V supply the RS 485 part with voltage but not the corrector The hous
31. 61 month 62 Modb sync day 64 Modb sync minute 65 Modb sync second M M M M 63 Modb sync hour M M M SF co 1 8 com 66 Modb sync trigger KCO03 Time sync rule Specifies criteria that define whether an external timer e g DSfG radio clock external contact can be used to set the time on the corrector e Always Clock can always be set PTB criterion strict The time can be adjusted automatically if the adjustment occurs within a time window of 20 seconds but at least once a day the calibration lock is open PTB crit Soft The time can be adjusted automatically according to the strict PTB criterion but also if User access password is open After the corrector is restarted and if initial synchronization has not yet occurred The clock runs incorrectly for more than 59 minutes and 40 seconds daylight saving time missed After the clock is adjusted manually and subsequent synchronization has not yet occurred e g to test whether automatic synchronization works by deliberately setting the clock to the incorrect time KC01 Sync mode input Defines the source and interpretation of a time synchronization originating from an external source The following options are available off e DSfG Time synchronization is only expected via DSfG and accepted Time contact to full minute Time contact to half minute Time contact to full hour Time contac
32. 65 1 65 2 65 3 65 4 65 5 65 6 65 7 65 8 65 9 66 0 66 1 66 2 66 3 66 4 66 5 66 6 66 7 66 8 66 9 67 0 67 1 67 2 67 3 67 4 67 5 67 6 67 7 67 8 67 9 68 0 68 1 68 2 68 3 68 4 68 5 70 0 70 1 70 2 70 3 70 6 70 7 70 8 DSfG unex char DSfG overflow DSfG checksum DSfG broadcast DSfG broadc ign DSfG busterm Restart archive EAV 1 failed EAV 1 lt I warn lim EAV 1 gt up warn lim sd failure 21 EAV 1 fail 2IV EAV2 failed EAV2 I warn lim EAV2 gt up warn lim EAV2 fail 2IV EAV3 failed EAV3 I warn lim EAV3 gt up warn lim EAV3 fail 2IV EAVA failed EAVA I warn lim EAV4 gt up warn lim EAV4 fail 2IV EAV5 failed EAV5 I warn lim EAV5 gt up warn lim EAV5 fail 2IV EAV6 failed EAV6 lt l warn lim EAV6 gt up warn lim EAV6 fail 2IV EAV7 failed EAV7 I warn lim EAV7 gt up warn lim EAV7 fail 2IV EAV8 failed EAV8 I warn lim EAV8 gt up warn lim EAV8 fail 2IV Pulse 1 gt max Pulse 2 gt max Pulse 3 gt max Pulse 4 gt max 11 outp min 12 outp min I3 outp min DSfG unexpected characters DSfG buffer overflow DSfG checksum incorrect DSfG checksum incorrect broadcast telegram DSfG broadcast telegram ignored DSfG missing bus termination Restart archive after cleaning Extra analog value 1 first input valuer failed Extra analog value 1 below lower warning limit Extra analog value 1 exceeds upper warning limit Standard density
33. 78 7 78 8 78 9 79 0 79 1 79 2 79 3 79 4 79 5 79 6 79 7 79 8 80 0 80 1 80 2 80 3 80 4 80 5 80 6 80 7 80 8 80 9 81 0 81 1 81 2 81 3 81 4 81 5 81 6 81 7 81 8 81 9 82 0 82 1 82 2 DP3 failure DP max DP s incoherent HART Corr gt max DP 1 Corr denied G486 violated GQM list Main GQ unknown Ref GQ unknown Main GQ CRC 12 Ref GQ CRC12 flow in close FC BIOS old HART 1 status HART2 status status HART4 status HART5 status HART6 status HART status HART 10 status HART11 status HART 12 status dkvk gt max IGM SV invalid Path failure gt max AGA8 lt gt range Eta loss Eta l alarm lim Eta gt up alarm lim Eta l warn lim Eta gt up warn lim Eta param error Eta jump Path 1 measurem Path 2 measurem Path 3 measurem Path 4 measurem Path 5 measurem Path 6 measurem Path 7 measurem Path 8 measurem Path 1 communic Path 2 communic Path 3 communic Path 4 communic delta P cell 3 failure delta P bigger maximum delta P team play of cells is not harmonious Maximum permitted HART Correction out of range Zero point correction for DP1 not accepted DVGW G486 1 3 rule violated Gas is incompatible with GERG GQM list is fault Main gas quality unknown identification Reference gas quality unknown identification Main gas quality CRC 12 implausible Reference Gas Quality CRC 12 implausible Flow in closed pipe Flowcomputer bios version is to old HART 1 status reports trouble
34. A The basic value is derived from the uncorrected measured value prior to offset correction using the value from field AC 17 Special data that indicates the origin of average values This value is used for the DSfG revision Blue fields display the freeze values note the triggering time A 3 AD Superior calorific value Access Line Designation Value Unit AS 1 Measured value 119255 Indicates the origin of the value in this case from the default If a reference to a current input appears here for example direct access to the input can be gained via the link 5 Default 11 000 kWh m3 The source should be deactivated if the default value is used D 23 Timeout 18000 S D 24 Base value 11 9255 kWh m3 D 25 Mean for DSfG 11 9255 kWh m3 EX D 27 Current status Fixed value mud D 28 DSfG status Fixed value D 29 Used range 0 000 kWh m3 77 68 830 Format A 1 31 Min drag indicator 11 9255 kWh m3 D 32 Max drag indicator 11 9255 kWh m3 D 33 Current gradient 0 000 kWh m3 s D 34 Second mean 11 9255 kWh m3 D 35 Minute meam 11 9255 kWh m3 D 36 Hourly mean 11 9255 kWh m3 D 37 Ongoing mean 11 9255 kWh m3 D 38 Std deviation 0 000 kWh m3 For online correction old FE 06 function D 43 Running time out D 44 Holding value 10 9949 kWh m3 ES 49 Hsoftestgas 1101 _ tka ox 300 For online correction old FE 06 function 47 Revision mean 11 9255 k
35. DIL switch of the COM 4 interface to be accessed Since the master is always a part of the corrector and it is therefore necessary to have two cables connected there is no difference from a functional point of view whether DIL 1 or 2 is used for activation 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Meaning if switch is closed Device GND is at the connector housing GND is at pins 2 and 7 of the connector Standard always ON GND is at pin 5 of the connector Standard always ON Connects the 510 ohm resistor to pin 5 of the connector Quiescent level GND Connects the 510 ohm resistor to pin 8 of the connector Quiescent level GND Connects the 510 ohm resistor to pin 3 of the connector Quiescent level 5 V Connects the 510 ohm resistor to pin 1 of the connector Quiescent level 5 V Connects 5V to pin 1 of the connector 134 Closed means that the relevant switch is at ON Examples of standard settings in practice _ Device fulfils the function of the master of the DSfG bus All switches at ON Device is not at one end of the DSfG bus Switches 2 and 3 at ON Note The terminating resistors of the bus have to be connected externally to the hubs or to both ends of the trunk cable 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Block diagram CF card PC 104 COM F Display Sealed switch Keyboard Front LEDs ELAN MC 520 C a CAN A Basic card with 10 controller M32 family Internal RAM 30 kb Flash 512 kb
36. Eta loss Eta l alarm lim Eta gt up alarm lim Eta jump HFX miss pulses HFY miss pulses Kpp loss Kpp lt l alarm lim Kpp gt up alarm lim Kpp jump JTC loss JTC lt l alarm lim JTC gt up alarm lim JTC jump GC components USZ alarm USZ timeout Math problem Corrupt code Alarm volume rd loss rd l alarm lim rd gt up alarm lim rd jump Namur module A open circuit main channel Namur module A open circuit reference channel Namur module B analog digital converter Namur module B overload Namur module B open circuit PT100 Namur module B open circuit main channel Namur module B open circuit reference channel delta P cell 1 current lower 3 mA delta P cell 2 current lower 3 mA delta P cell 3 current lower 3 mA illegal diameter ratio throat pipe delta P cell 1 failure delta P cell 2 failure delta P cell 3 failure delta P bigger maximum GQM list is fault Main gas quality unknown identification Reference gas quality unknown identification Main gas quality CRC12 implausible Reference Gas Ouality CRC12 implausible Maximum deviation at operating point exceeded IGM invalid substitute value used Number of path failure s greater than allowed Loss of viscosity Viscosity below lower alarm limit Viscosity exceeds upper alarm limit Viscosity gradient exceeds maximum Counter main channel HFX malfunction Counter reference channel HFY malfunction Loss of isentropic coefficient Isentropic coefficient below lower alarm
37. Ethernet 62 3 8 Remote control parameter ization ccccscsscsscscssecsssssccccsssssssecsessssscsssseeseeens 63 3 8 1 Connecting a notebooki cene ree etta tee Feet eee Ra a e nee e Rina ceeds eR een ede enean n 63 3 8 2 Setting the addresses ete 63 EE NEEDS SES IM M 63 RE MEMUCWradhiceem MM 63 3 9 2 Setting the time and sce 64 3 9 3 2 amp 2 2 reris ireen RER E ASERS TEREE EE 64 3 9 4 Determining the ON time for the 15 2 2 2 64 3 10 2000 integrated data logger for maximum values 65 3 10 1 Example for 66 3 10 2 Option for checking the maximum value storage 67 3 11 Environment ee teee eese rore RENE E ERE senses ences Er denied 67 CONTENTS EC T 001 c 68 4 1 m Ae 68 4 2 7 Deb Dad Fn Es EEES 70 4 3 Installation of the expansion module eceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eene teen 75 44 Parameterizdilobi EM MS RUP 78 C 80 Sel DSfGin ge
38. Ethernet TCP IP The Modbus address and register offset parameters and the superblock definitions jointly apply to all 4 Modbus interfaces 6 MODBUS 6 2 Combined fault messages Register s 474 and 9118 contain s combined faults messages in the form of a bit pattern Only alarms are relevant warnings and hints are not taken into account Bit Symbol 0 dP 1 Gbh 2 T SN 4 Vn 5 Vb 6 n b 7 n b 8 n b 9 n b 10 n b 11 n b 12 n b 13 n b 14 n b 15 n b Examples 00000000 00000000 There is no alarm pending Meaning Differential pressure LSB Gas quality Temperature Pressure Volume at base cond Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used In the ERZ 2000 all alarms are checked for logical relationship and Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Volume at meas cond Bit 4 Bit 5 are mapped in a specific bit as collective alarms in register 474 Differential pressure alarms Gas quality alarms Temperature alarms Pressure alarms Alarms in connection with the volume at base conditions Alarms in connection with the volume at measurement conditions The same bit pattern can be found in the specific 9000 range in register 9118 MSB 00000000 00010000 There is an alarm pending which affects only the volume at base conditions 00000000 00010100 There is an alarm pending which affects the temperature and the volume at base conditio
39. If the gas quality source gas chromatograph or calorimeter supplies the relative density rd instead of the standard density rhon you can parameterize the device in the Standard density chapter with the Operating mode function so that it calculates the standard density from the relative density NOTE n For custody transfer metering with two gas quality measuring devices calculations in accordance with AGA 8 92 DC are only permissible if both devices measure and transmit the individual components e g two process gas chromatographs if a combination of a process gas chromatograph and a correlative gas quality measuring device is used mode GC 1 GC2 has to be chosen Equation GPA 2172 96 can be used for calculating the superior calorific value and the relative density at 60 and under 14 696 psia US reference values The relevant displays can be found under DL GPA 2172 96 Parameterization can be made in the menu under superior calorific value or relative density 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 2 10 Information about the ID display You can access the device data by pressing the lt gt ID key They can only be displayed here There is no option for inputting data if the ID display is shown If you want to enter values you have to enter them together with the parameters of the associated transmitter device in the appropriate chapter or column of the coordinate system For example the ID display data of the press
40. J 20 HART identification 0 A 98 NI Resistance measurement 1 terminal X5 7 X5 8 X5 9 X5 10 Access Line Designation Value Unit 5 Converter value 0066B182 hex 231 12 control Displays which function uses this measured value i e the beneficiary the gas temperature in this case Diagnostic information for the monitoring of the 4 wire measurement for short circuits or breakages A 99 NL Frequency input 1 X8 oder X9 Access Line Designation Value Unit 1 Frequency 1 80 5163 Hz 3 Input pulses 1 48103 Pulse Display of the input frequency in this case the operating volume measurement channel see line 15 Beneficiary If the Ex card is used this input becomes vacant and can be used for other counter inputs The relevant value and unit are entered here B 10 Weighting al E Unit 232 100 NT Contact inputs terminal X7 X8 Access Line Designation Value Unit Assignment for functions M Aa 2 Input pattern Current inputs 9 and 10 when using the Ex card 11 and 12 reserved for second Ex card 2 HART measure value 0 3 Uncalib Current 0 0000 mA J 17 HART unit code 18 HART manufact code 0 J 19 HART type code 0 J 20 HART identification 0 Access Line Designation Value Unit Resistance input 3 when using the Ex card 4 SS reserved for second Ex card B 12
41. M 54 3 Red GOM active Redundant gas quality measurement active 1 No 232 W 54 4 GOM 1 failure Gas quality measurement 1 failure 2 No 233 W 54 5 GOM failure Gas quality measurement 2 failure 2 No 234 W 54 6 sd 1 failure Loss of standard density GOM 1 2 No 235 W 54 7 sd 2 failure Loss of standard density GOM2 2 No 236 W 54 8 Hs 1 failure Loss of superior calorific value GOM 1 2 No 237 W 54 9 Hs GQM2 failure Loss of superior calorific value GOM2 2 No 238 W 55 0 CO2 1 failure Loss of carbon dioxide GOM 1 2 No 239 W 55 1 CO2 GOM 2 failure Loss of carbon dioxide GOM2 2 No 240 W 55 2 H2 failure Loss of hydrogen GOM 1 2 No 241 W 55 3 H2 failure Loss of hydrogen GOM2 2 No 242 W 55 4 N2 failure Loss of mitrogen GQM1 2 No 243 W 55 5 N2 failure Loss of mitrogen GOM2 2 No 244 W 55 6 VOS lt gt theory VOS deviation between measurement and theory 2 No 245 W 55 7 Master clock Master clock shows unexpected behaviour 2 No 246 W 55 8 rd 1 failure Loss of relative density GOM 1 2 No 247 W 55 9 rd GOM2 failure Loss of relative density GOM2 2 No 248 A R 56 0 Channel 1 fault Pulse counting channel 1 implausible 1 No 249 A R 56 1 Channel 2 fault Pulse counting channel 2 implausible 1 No 250 A 56 2 Tc Tb comb Tc Tb combination not permitted 1 No 251 H 56 3 CAN check CAN bus plausibilization 1 No 252 H 56 4 Service request Service staff urgently required 1 No 253 H 56 5 Old time Time immedi
42. R 90 3 F4 failure Frequency measurement 4 failed 2 No 515 A R 90 4 F5 failure Frequency measurement 5 failed 2 No 516 A R 90 5 F6 failure Frequency measurement 6 failed 2 No 517 A R 90 6 F7 failure Frequency measurement 7 failed 2 No 518 A R 90 7 F8 failure Frequency measurement 8 failed 2 No 519 A R 91 0 11 failure Current measurement 1 failed 2 No 520 A R 91 1 I2 failure Current measurement 2 failed 2 No 521 A R 91 2 I3 failure Current measurement 3 failed 2 No 522 A R 91 3 I4 failure Current measurement 4 failed 2 No 523 A R 91 4 15 failure Current measurement 5 failed 2 No 524 A R 91 5 16 failure Current measurement 6 failed 2 No 525 A R 91 6 I7 failure Current measurement 7 failed 2 No 526 A R 91 7 18 failure Current measurement 8 failed 2 No 527 A 91 8 GC components GC components for complete analysis are bad 2 No 528 H 91 9 Def display Display is defective 2 No 529 A R 92 0 PT1 failure Resistance measurement 1 failed 2 No 530 A R 92 1 PT2 failure Resistance measurement 2 failed 2 No 531 A R 92 2 HART 1 failure HART 1 input failed 2 No 532 A R 92 3 HART failure HART 2 input failed 2 No 533 A R 92 4 HART failure HART 3 input failed 2 No 534 A R 92 5 HART4 failure HART 4 input failed 2 No 535 A R 92 6 HARTS failure HART 5 input failed 2 No 536 A R 92 7 HART6 failure HART 6 input failed 2 No 537 A R 92 8 Corrupt param corrupted parameter detected 1 No 538 A R 93 0 Def cont inp Contact input failed 2 No 539 H 93 1 Hscorr
43. Signal ground 6 TxD B 7 E 8 RxD B R TN B data 9 COM 2 RS 232 Pin 1 2 RxD 3 TxD 4 5 GND 6 7 8 9 COM 3 Pin DSfG mode RS 232 mode 1 U Power supply 5V DC 2 GND Reference potential GND RxD 3 R TA A data TxD 4 a Unassigned DTR 5 SGND GND GND 6 U GND E 7 GND GND RTS 8 R TN B data CTS 9 Unassigned 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS COM 4 Pin DSfG mode U GND R TA SGND U GND R TN o0 WN COM 5 modem RS 232 Pin DCD RxD TxD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI 400 RA WN Power supply 5V DC Reference potential GND A data Unassigned GND GND GND B data Unassigned RS 232 mode RxD TxD GND 123 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 11 2 4 input NAMUR signals connection options of the measuring input as an example Volume transmitter NAMUR sensor or switch with line monitoring Selectable operating modes Standard NAMUR gt The card adapts to the standardized NAMUR levels RMG factory settings The card adapts to the optimized levels for the TRZ 03 Manual adjustment gt The levels set can be adjusted manually 124 NAMUR Reed Electron transmitter switch switch F 10 kohms 3 3 kohms 10 kohms 3 3 kohms p Meas AU channel Connect screen on rear panel of device to terminal strip Volume transmitter switch without line monitoring Reed switch or transistor standard NAMUR setting Reed Electron switch switch
44. Site faulty The testing aid is activated with the setting FG43 Testing aid calibration aid A PC can be connected to COM 5 The interface parameters are fixed at 38400 baud and 8N1 The interface mode B21 COM5 operating mode is irrelevant All coordinates can be read and written using a terminal program e g RMG terminal The variable name defined in the browser via the network interface is used for reference purposes Examples e Read absolute pressure ABO Measurement value drka Return e Write absolute pressure 5 Default 45 drkaVg 45 Return e Export error memory actErr Return During write operations with a preceding the described coordinates are immediately shown on the display for control purposes Example e Write and display absolute pressure ABO5 Default 45 drkaVg 45 Return If the power is OFF the testing aid is shut down automatically or set to FG43 Testing aid off ANNEX FH Ultrasonic flow meter diagnosis A 43 5 5 Lo o 26 bo g 3 9 S ox S us 52 rm 85 Designation Value Access Line ANNEX A 44 FI Test cabinet Access Line Designation Value Unit Q 2 Refreahtime 2 Internal displays and parameters for testing devices in the Beindersheim factory Periodically displays all measured values without having to press any buttons The refresh time specifies the time it takes to switch the display
45. The archive groups 11 12 and 13 are described The data elements are hardly ever displayed either As a consequence the results of a completed functional test can only really be accessed via a browser Time stamp 4 z 14 03 2006 _ 14 03 2006 14 03 2006 14 03 2006 mal m 16 01 26 16 01 36 16 02 36 16 02 46 Vsb 431 100 431 100 431 100 m s 37 4366 37 4366 37 4366 K 0 92223 0 92223 0 92223 c02 6 200 6 200 6 200 mol H2 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol N2 10 000 10 000 10 000 mol CH4 83 800 83 800 83 800 mol C2H6 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol C3H8 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol N C4 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol I C4 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol N C5 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol l C5 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol NeoC5 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol C6 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol C7 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol C8 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol C9 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol C10 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol H2S 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol H20 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol He 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol 02 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol co 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol C2H4 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol C3H6 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol Ar 0 000 0 000 0 000 mol The 3 columns in the center under the heading Test shown in bold contain the results of the functional test The first column contains the start values the central column contains the deviations and average values and the third column contains the end values The prestart and follow up sections also contain meaningful test times and relevant data dependin
46. are calculated from the better HF input 2 channel HF x y The number of pulses per time or per rotation of the turbine wheel is not the same on the two channels The input pulses can have any phasing The difference formation is only performed in the software The quantities counted differently per time are corrected and then compared using the entered HFmeas pulse value and HFref pulse value parameters An alarm is generated if there is a deviation exceeding the Comp limit 76 Vm progress and the flow rate are calculated from the better HF input 2 channel HF LF The number of pulses per time or per rotation of the turbine wheel is not the same on the two channels The input pulses can have any phasing The difference formation is only performed in the software The specified deviation results from the ratio between the HFmeas pulse value and LF pulse value parameters inputted An alarm is generated if there is a deviation exceeding the Comp limit 26 If the device switches over to the reference channel e g if a fault occurs it is only possible to calculate a flow rate with reduced accuracy 1 channel HF Vm progress and the flow rate are calculated from the HF measuring channel There is no reference channel and no monitoring for synchronous run 1 channel LF Vm progress is calculated from the measuring channel in this case LF A flow rate with reduced accuracy is determined from the signal There is no
47. below lower warning limit Superior calorific value exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization superior calorific value Loss of carbon dioxide Carbon dioxide below lower alarm limit Carbon dioxide exceeds upper alarm limit Carbon dioxide gradient exceeds maximum Carbon dioxide below lower warning limit Carbon dioxide exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization carbon dioxide Loss of VSM VSM below lower alarm limit VSM exceeds upper alarm limit VSM gradient exceeds maximum VSM below lower warning limit VSM exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization VSM Loss of hydrogen Hydrogen below lower alarm limit Hydrogen exceeds upper alarm limit Hydrogen gradient exceeds maximum Hydrogen below lower warning limit Hydrogen exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization hydrogen Channel 1 failed Channel 2 failed Meter start up time too long Meter slow down time too long Loss of VSB VSB below lower alarm limit VSB exceeds upper alarm limit N NY NY YN N N N NNN HNNN NNN H NNNNNN NNNNNN H NNN YN YN N No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
48. by pressing the Cursor Right or Left key During the time you are browsing the current coordinate is displayed for approx 2 seconds in the fourth line Further guidance is provided by the option of permanently showing the coordinate of the current field together with each value displayed To do this press 0 Mode and browse downwards to Display Then press Enter and the Cursor Up or Down key to access the Coordinates function and set the parameter to Yes Now all fields will be displayed together with their coordinates Since the 4 character coordinates will then appear long texts exceeding 20 characters per line will be truncated on the display 2 2 2 Levels and rights of access The ERZ 2000 system provides three access levels to change parameters or device settings The lowest level is the user level which is protected by code It is marked B C or P in the following documentation The second level is protected by the official calibration lock in the form of a sealable turn switch It is marked E in the following documentation The third and highest level is the special purpose level superuser level which is reserved for type changes etc The special purpose level can be reached by entering the code and by additionally opening the calibration lock It is marked S in the following documentation A symbol point rhombus or blank indicates whether a value displayed can be edited The symbol is located between the line information and
49. code word 2 Open the calibration switch Observe the sequence specified Set the user profile to Service or Developer 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION a Now set the Software Update parameter to yes Mode key cursor down to Software ID ENTER cursor up to Software Update The flow computer finishes the correction process and immediately starts waiting for the software update to begin Read the information on the flow computer display Once initiated the process can then be interrupted by pressing the 0 key on the keyboard of the flow computer Pay attention to what the Hyperterminal program outputs on the display The letter C should appear at one second intervals to indicate that a data connection is still active Now transfer the application to the flow computer The application consists of several files packed into a ZIP archive Select the ZIP archive e g E1 7 O ZIP in Hyperterminal Transfer Send file and send using the Ymodem transfer protocol Monitor the progress bar in Hyperterminal and the equivalent indicator on the flow computer display After the transfer is complete the flow computer checks the ZIP file for validity and consistency and reports the result on the Hyperterminal display If the result is negative the ZIP file will be destroyed in the flow computer so that the previous application is preserved If the result is positive the unpacking process will be integrated into the booting up procedure of the flow co
50. exceeds upper alarm limit Hydrogen gradient exceeds maximum Loss of VSB Bit information flux control Vn T Vn T Vn T Vn T Vn Vn Vn Vn Vn Vn Vn Vn Vn P Vn P Vn P Vn P Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vb Vn Vn Vn Vn Vn Vn Gbh Vb Vn Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Vn Vn Vn Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn 6 MODBUS 81A 82 A 83 A 87 88 A 89 A 90 A 94 95 A 96 A 97 A 105 A 110A 157 164 A R 165 195 200 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 A 211A 212A 213 A 214 A 215 216 217 218 219 220 227 248 249 250 255 256 A R 257 A R 323 A 365 A R 366 A R 367 A R 12 1 12 2 12 3 13 0 13 1 13 2 13 3 19 0 19 1 19 2 19 3 32 2 32 7 39 8 42 1 43 2 48 0 48 5 50 0 50 1 50 2 50 3 50 4 50 5 50 6 50 8 51 0 51 1 51 2 51 3 51 4 51 5 51 6 51 7 51 8 51 9 52 6 56 0 56 1 56 2 56 7 56 8 56 9 65 6 71 4 71 5 71 6 VSB lt l alarm lim VSB gt up alarm lim VSB jump Pg loss Pg l alarm lim Pg gt up alarm lim Pg jump N2 loss N2 l alarm lim N2 gt up alarm lim N2 jump CRC12 error V d Waals alarm flow signal loss RTC defective Def tot CAN timeout C fact failure T lt gt GERG lim P lt gt GERG lim rd lt gt GERG lim CO2 lt gt GERG lim N2 lt gt GERG lim Hs lt gt GERG lim H2 lt gt GERG lim GERG iter max T
51. fuel gas The inert gases He and Ar are not involved in the actual combustion process Ratio between the quantity of air actually supplied and the quantity of air theoretically supplied during complete combustion The H20 percentage in the quantity of supplied air is calculated using these constants Components of the supplied air that are not involved in the combustion process All exhaust components generated during combustion Natural gas C2H6 etc CHa CaHa He Ar etc H20 02 Combustion Ar H20 O over Air 2 H20 A 26 DK Composition of exhaust fumes Access Line Designation Value Unit Composition of the wet exhaust gas i e exhaust gas containing water vapor 160 Composition of the dry exhaust gas i e exhaust gas that does not contain water 7 D 15 O2dy 2 1199 A 27 EB Base values Access Line Designation Value Unit ES 1 Pbase selection 1 01325 bar Typical national reference values for 88 S Constants for the linearization of PT 100 500 1000 temperature Production and test state of the device There are 4 states that can only be reversed in the factory DAN Selection of device type in the testing laboratory only S mL EB22 Yes Calculation of a complete standard volum
52. gas analyzer The module and the analyzer are spatially divided from each other but form a whole Thus the ERZ 2000 obtains a new functionality which is called GC 6000 The module is configured to slot 3A and occupies the connectors X9 and X10 on the 68 rear panel It converts the foundation fieldbus signals to the ERZ s internal modular bus and outputs the control signals for the sampling calibration gas and reference gas valves n In this constellation it is not possible to use an internal explosion protection card With the 7 2000 the gas quality data of the GC 6000 appear in column IH Gas quality imported via GC 6000 or RMG bus and can be routed from here to the desired measured value inputs e g superior calorific value or standard density In addition the gas quality data can be distributed via the RMG bus to other correctors e g also to older ERZ 9000 T For this purpose set the interface mode RMG bus master at COM 1 COM3 or COM4 Inside the device the gas quality data are archived in archive OH AG8 GC6000 GO and in the Long term archive GC6000 ketch of a unidirectional measurement installation Ex zone Foundation fieldbus Gas analyzer ERZ 2000 Expansion module Ex isolation of control signals 4 GC 6000 Sketch of a multidirectional measurement installation Ex zone Foundation fieldbus RMG Gas ERZ 2000 analyzer 69 Expansion module Ex isolation of cont
53. higher The rule of thirds determines whether the conversion factor calculation via GERG 88 S is permitted for a gas See also CC12 The message H78 1 G486 violated DVGW G486 1 3 rule violated Gas is not GERG compatible may be displayed to indicate that the rule has been violated See also CC14 CC14 G486 mess active Activates the message H78 1 G486 violated DVGW C486 1 3 rule violated Gas is compatible when the rule of thirds for propane 72 and butane or higher CC13 is violated Only meaningful when full analysis is present CC31 min drag indicator and CC32 max drag indicator The drag indicator records the smallest or largest measured value that was achieved since the drag indicator was last restarted or reset The drag indicator is reset either globally via the trigger 14 reset all drag indicators or individually reset this drag indicator only The drag indicator must be called onto the display and the enter key pressed to perform an individual reset Depending on the selected mode E 27 the drag indicator is derived from the measured value used for correction or the original measured value If the drag indicator does not need to be displayed the setting can be configured accordingly under 16 A 11 CD equation of state 2 o o z z o narrow wide Designation Value Unit case Default if LV is exceeded GERG equation Acco
54. is overwritten 5 2 6 Archive identifiers Text for identifying the corresponding archive group can be entered in coordinates 005 to D12 The DSfG retrieval system reads these archive identifiers archive names when retrieving master data and uses them for visualization purposes 6 MODBUS 6 MODBUS 6 1 Concept In the ERZ 2000 there is a user definable configurable range of 50 MODBUS registers preset in the factory with 25 values of 4 bytes each defaults The contents of these 50 registers can be changed by the user at any time 84 This user configurable range is called MODBUS superblock All data of the superblock are stored under consecutive register addresses This enables data to be transmitted quickly without a lot of individual queries An offset can be assigned to the superblock In addition there is a fixed range where the most important user data are stored These registers cannot be changed by way of configuration This fixed range is directly attached to the superblock and will be automatically shifted with the offset Changing data in the superblock When you edit items in the superblock apart from the name of the variable the coordinate of the variable is used as the most important selection assistant You can read the coordinate directly from the device To do this select the desired value press the key Select and the coordinate will appear in the second line in front of the name of the measured value shown
55. mS IA 1 coordinates Separate IP4 address Configure the separate IP4 address for the ERZ 2000 here for the network e g 192 6 10 154 The ERZ 2000 192 operates as a HTTP server under this address and can be addressed by the PC using a standard browser Internet Explorer Netscape IA 2 coordinates http port This value is typically available at port 80 IA 6 coordinates Host name Basic setting is MR1 IA 7 coordinates Domain suffix Basic setting is rmg de IA 13 coordinates Net mask Network mask basic setting Administrator IA 14 coordinates Gateway Gateway basic setting Administrator IA 15 coordinates DHCP 7 Automatic assignment of IP4 address network mask and gateway menu with yes and no normal setting no IA 16 coordinates Inactive timeout Only for test 17 coordinates Data timeout Only for test IA 19 coordinates Max block size Block size setting for data transfers to the Ethernet interface lowest value 512 bytes highest value 2048 bytes IA 21 coordinates DNS Domain Name Service IP address of the service for the name resolution Setting associated with the time service function via the network Refer to the separate manual for further important information ERZ2000 remote operation A 66 IB Serial interfaces Access Line Designation Value Unit B 1 Baud rate COM1 9600 B 2 B P S COM1 8N1 COM 1 for RTU ASCII modbus IGM USE09 RMG bus output DZU FLOWSIC60
56. module used For information about the locations of expansion cards and the assignment to multipoint 116 connectors please see the data sheet for the device The unassigned slots can optionally be used for the following expansion cards DSfG card for corrector and recording entities and DSfG master Isolating card for volume measuring and reference channels Vo P and T with 4 to 20mA or HART HART card single for three transmitters or dual for up to 6 transmitters Profibus in preparation 11 2 Terminal diagrams 11 2 1 Rear panel of the device Since the device has been designed for universal use there are more terminals than the individual device e g a PTZ corrector requires There is a standard assignment of terminals which from the point of view of the numbering always uses the first pins all the other pins are spare pins or can be assigned via the software It is also possible to connect the pressure transmitter to one of the unassigned spare inputs and to select it via the software X1 X2 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 xg X10 ol ol fol ol ol ol ol ol ol fol 1 a 1 e oss 11 e Pr 11 51 1 14e 1 e 11 e se 1e 2 5 2 P 20 3 20 I11e 20 14e 2 0 m 2 as 2 2 o 3 2 3
57. of the individual field HN Path 1 see the separate ERZ 2000 USC Details docu HO Path 2 mentation HP Path 3 HQ Path 4 HR Path 5 HS Path 6 HT Path 7 HU Path 8 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 2 6 Information about operating the device as an orifice plate flowcomputer ERZ 2014 2114 2012 2112 In this operating mode the sensor signals of the differential pressure measuring cells are connected to the flowcomputer via a 4 20 mA link The signals can optionally be evaluated analogly or digitally HART The transmitter mode is the preferred operating mode of the measuring cells for which the ERZ 2000 supplies 24 VDC To activate volume calculation via the differential pressure signals set the Orifice operating mode in the Meter chapter under Flow rate parameters In order to ensure that totalizers are calcuated through the differential 35 pressure signals you have to select one of the following device types ERZ 2014 2114 2012 or 2112 3 key Overview of Orifice The following data are available in the overview of Orifice Display of the current flow rate at measurement conditions the differential pressure the cell selected the diameter ratio beta the expansion factor epsilon the velocity of approach factor E and the flow e coefficient C To access the Orifice chapter coordinates GV 01 press the Cursor Left key once in the overview lt 3 gt key Here the following informatio
58. page 32 Reference pressure 101 325 kPa 1 01325 barabs Country Hs reference temperature C Temperature at base conditions C combustion gas measurement User specific setting 0 15 20 25 0 15 20 25 45 3 2 8 3 Adjustable extra base conditions Under the Calculated values heading press the 0 Mode key and the Cursor left key once there is the Extra base condition function Here you can convert the flow rate the standard density and the ratio of two standard densities rho n extra base condition rho n base condition in relation to other base conditions LL These values are available to the current outputs for allocation 3 2 9 Information about the K coefficient gas quality There are different ways of calculating the K coefficient of a gas K constant no calculation the default value for the K coefficient is used K calculated for ideal gas calculated 885 K calculated via AGA NX 19 L and H K calculated via AGA 8 1985 K calculated via AGA 8 92 DC K calculated via the Beattie Bridgeman equation for pure gases mass computer K calculated via the Van der Waals equation K calculated for GC 1 in accordance with AGA 8 92 DC and for GC 2 in accordance with GERG 88 S with automatic changeover in the case of a fault GC1 GC2 K calculated via AGA 8 Gross meth 1 K calculated via AGA 8 Gross meth 2 calculated 88 set B K calculated via GERG 888 set C
59. pipe surface is taken into account according to GOST 188 Roughness margin below which correction takes place A 61 GY Abrasion of orifice edge Time since the beginning radius was measured Access Line Designation Value Unit If the Calculation setting is selected the abrasion of the orifice is taken into account according to GOST Point in time when the beginning radius was ee Es Deine 1995 Default value for the correction factor The roughness and orifice abrasion are corrected according to GOST 8 586 regulations for the measurement of liquids and gases flow rate and quantity by means of orifice instruments 8 586 1 Part 1 Principle of the method of measurements and general requirements 8 586 2 Part 2 Orifice plates Technical requirements 8 586 5 Part 5 Measurement procedure The calculation procedure is complex and the description would extend beyond the boundaries of this device manual Therefore refer to the documents listed above for further details A 62 HB Energy flow rate Access Line Designation Value Unit mapa 88 Format for all flows can be adjusted separately mmm 0 0 3000000 0 D e S e Gs 30 hma D KW 24964 W 35 Meinen D 36 Howymean 30880 W D standard deviation D Tiesimp in 09002010002008 D Tmeiompma 09002010003851 F d
60. protocol Use the cursor key to browse to the Operating mode function Set the desired operating mode there after you have opened the calibration lock If the pressure sensor is to be operated using the HART protocol make sure that the operating mode is set to Measured value source value and a current input combined with the HART function is selected as source If the pressure sensor is operated as a transmitter make sure that its power supply is switched on in the associated menu of the current input The menu of the data sources comprises all metrological options of an input irrespective of whether or not these signals e g current or frequency signal analogous to the measured quantity exist for the selected transmitter 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 7 2 Temperature sensor The data of the temperature sensor used have to be communicated to the corrector as transmitter data Apart from the parameters for measurement the type manufacturer serial number etc have to be entered in the Gas Temperature chapter as well Then these data appear automatically in the ID display Example for data entry Press 1 Meas P T and set the arrow to T Press Enter and then the Cursor Down key to access the relevant values and enter the data EU For transmitting measured values there are the following operating modes OFF No measurement input is switched off mE Default Fixed value no measurement PT100 500 1000 Polynomial according
61. read digitally set coordinate ND 16 at HART If other current inputs are used other coordinates have to be taken into account 6 To see the data of the orifice plate press the Flow rates key and select Meter GV Orifice gt m Coordinate GV 10 and GV 11 For dimensions see coordinates GA 05 to GA11 Further data of the orifice plate can be found under AM Viscosity AN Isentropic exponent AO Joule Thomson coefficient 7 Temperature correction 8 Temperature correction of the orifice diameter GAO7 Throat at 20 C and the internal pipe diameter GAO8 Pipe diameter at 20 C is made in compliance with VDI VDE 2040 Sheet 2 Chapter 10 of April 1987 There are two methods of calculation one method is based on the coefficient of linear thermal expansion and the other one on an approximation equation with coefficients selected in accordance with the materials used for the orifice plate and piping The table below shows the various options for selection Temperature correction of orifice plate and piping GA10 Substance throat GA11 Substance pipe Coefficients Options for selection 0 12 60 0 0043 Stell Seems 1242 Stell 1205 10 52 17 00 16 30 17 01 16 13 16 13 17 52 Nike _ 1408 10 87 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR OFF The appropriate temperature correction is switched off Linear The correction factor T crr fact throat or GAO4 T crr fact pipe is
62. showing all available values which are directly or indirectly connected to gas quality The number of values is determined dynamically in accordance with the mode 25 settings and the state of the device There is an arrow displayed in front of the short designation of the first value which can be moved upwards or downwards using the cursor keys If the arrow is located on AGA 8 92DC for example you can now press Enter to directly jump to the K coefficient chapter Here you can reach the functions coordinates of interest to you using the cursor keys Example Flow rate values Key Cancel Flow rates If you press 8 Flow rates the display will jump to showing all available flow rate results The number of values is determined dynamically in accordance with the mode settings and the state of the device There is an arrow gt displayed in front of the short designation of the first value which can be moved upwards or downwards using the cursor keys If the arrow is located on Qe for example you can now press Enter to directly jump to the Energy flow rate chapter Here you can reach the functions coordinates of interest to you using the cursor keys Remaining keys 3 Orifice Accesses an overview of the orifice plate for ERZ 2014 2114 2012 2112 If you press the Cursor Left key you can access further data of the orifice plate 4 1 0 Directly accesses outputs and by pressing the Cursor Right key inputs 5
63. the IL and IN fields are only exemplary 5 DSfG 5 1 DSfGin general The Digitale Schnittstelle f r Gasmessger te i e digital interface for gas metering devices DSfG in short is described comprehensively in the documents only available in German below 80 G485 Technische Regeln Arbeitsblatt September 1997 Gas Information Nr 7 3 berarbeitung 04 2007 Technische Spezifikation f r DSfG Realisierungen Teil 1 Grundlegende Spezifikationen Teil 2 Abbildung der DSfG auf die 60870 5 101 104 Teil 3 DSfG Datenelementelisten These documents are issued by DVGW Deutsche Vereinigung des Gas und Wasserfaches e V Postfach 140362 53058 Bonn Germany Telephone 49 0 228 9188 5 Telefax 49 0 228 9188 990 They can be ordered in printed form at Wirtschafts und Verlagsgesellschaft Gas und Wasser mbH Postfach 140151 53056 Bonn Germany And they can be downloaded as files at www dvgw de gas messtechnik und abrechnung gasmessung In this user manual it is assumed that these DSfG documents are known The following text briefly describes the DSfG functionality implemented in the ERZ 2000 in compliance with these regulations 5 2 DSfG with the ERZ 2000 5 2 1 Serial interfaces If the ERZ 2000 is to be used as DSfG master has to be used and the DSfG master mode These are usable for DSfG mode is to be chosen DSfG master B9 operating mode If the ERZ 2000 is t
64. the text e g Any column line 2 02 Input value Y Blank Value cannot be edited Any column line 9 09 e Lower alarm limit Point Value can be edited but is locked by means of the user code or the official calibration lock 09 Lower alarm limit Ww Rhombus Value has been enabled for editing 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 2 3 Visibility levels Dynamic hiding or showing of displays in the coordinate system depends on several factors Firstly the device type set ERZ 2004 ERZ 2002 ERZ 2104 etc determines which parts of the coordinate system are relevant and only those are shown Secondly there are visibility levels which can make further restrictions These levels have been given names which correspond to the scope or range of displays shown The lowest level is the Gas meter reader who can access only a few useful displays or overviews via the keyboard while the rest cannot be accessed by him her This level can be selected by the user if outside access is to be prevented The next level up is the standard setting and is named User With this setting all measured values parameters auxiliary quantities etc which are useful for the selected device type and the chosen operating modes are visible and can be edited The device automatically shows only the coordinates or columns which are required Above this level there is another level which is called Service At the service level there is no dynamic h
65. to activate a comparison between two conversion factors foreground background Example C calculated via P T and K is to be compared with C calculated via density and standard density The corrector is used as a superior calorific value corrector and in addition to this density and standard density transmitters are connected The density transmitters can be activated under extra analog value 1 2 OF Extra analog value 22 1 OG Extra analog value 2 Access Line Designation Value Unit Here reference is made to the extra analog value Extra analog 1 Extra analog 1 2 7 6 Other transmitter data To input the data of other transmitters proceed in the same way as described under 2 4 1 to 2 4 4 This basically applies to all gas components see BA Components mode 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 Operating the gas volume corrector 3 1 Description of function keys 3 1 1 Coordinate structure All measured and calculated values parameters and functions are organized in a coordinate system There are several tables with columns and lines as with a spreadsheet There is a heading for each table where all 23 chapters are combined which are logically connected to each other The chapters correspond to the columns of a table while the fields within a table lines are the functions or coordinates Counting within a table is made using combinations of letters and digits starting with AA
66. to change over to input mode and select the desired unit using the cursor keys Press Enter to terminate your entries and close the calibration lock again All the other functions and displays related to the pressure value will have been changed over to the new unit automatically If you want to change custody transfer parameters you have to remove the official seal and set the calibration switch to the Unlock position As soon as the first parameter has been changed this is entered in the logbook together with the Calibration lock open entry The gas volume corrector will stop correcting immediately and will not supply current measured values until the calibration switch has been set to the Lock position again 3 2 3 Activating inputs and or outputs In chapter El Configuration under the 0 Mode key superuser protection you can activate the required inputs and or outputs The principle according to which this is to be done is explained by the example of the inputs The number of activated inputs decides on whether the corrector samples the relevant terminals in order to determine the measured value If the input for the number of resistance measurements is at 0 no measurement will be taken If you intend to connect a PT 100 you have to differentiate whether the explosion protection is external or internal since this decides whether terminal X 4 or X 10 is to be used for connection In the case of an Ex d protected PT 100 at X 4 lin
67. to the next block of 4 A 45 File system Access Line Designtion Value Unit n 7 A 46 FL Ultrasonic profile of velocities Access Line Designation Value Unit These are the profile factors of the ultrasound meter E A 47 GA Tube dimensions Access Line Designation Value Unit Linear heat expansion coefficient of the orifice Linear heat expansion coefficient of the pipe INCL 7 77 Mame ES 13 Orifceat coert 8300 ESI Coefficients for the GOST ES 15 Tube mem 16 7 700 ES 17 Tubea2co 3400 The temperature correction of the orifice diameter GAO7 Orifice 20 C and the internal pipe diameter GAO08 Pipe diameter 20 C is calculated according to VDI VDE 2040 sheet 2 section 10 from April 1987 There are two methods of calculation one is based on the linear heat expansion coefficients while the other is based on the approximation equation with coefficients selected in line with the orifice and pipe materials The following table shows the available options Temperature correction for orifice and pipe GA10 Substance orifice GA11 Substance pipe Coefficients diea ee pomme m Steet 120 oos Stell 1242 000 Stell 120 0005 Steel V 0 0038 Copper E Cu 16 13 0 0038 Brass Ms63 0 0089 Nike 1408 0008
68. type WBZ 08 7 222 4 Locking seal 2 Ser No 1 0 wire seal Meas PT Analysis Archive Test PQRS TUV HI Turbine gas meter type TRZ 03 E 7 211 Ser No 7 8 0 80 03 Totali Mod ID Select Al otalizer lode elec Scar Ultrasonic gas meter type USZ 08 7 241 Ser No 01 04 Z Nr 058949 4 Front panel with main plate main seal and seal diagram gez Eckert ERZ 2104 superior calorific value corrector Date 21 02 06 RMG MESSTECHNIK GMBH with ET 2000 data logger and gepr WBZ 08 vortex meter TRZ 03 turbine meter USZ 08 ultrasonic flowmeter ANNEX FLOW COMPUTER SYSTEM ERZ 2000 Ser No Year O Power Further data press butt O Run Main seal RMG MESSTECHNIK GMBH P nass Germany Warn Data logger ET2000 Ser No O Alarm Press function button 5 Archive Back with any button ade I A 5 Vortex gas meter type WBZ 08 7 222 4 Locking seal 2 Ser No 1 0 wire seal Meas Analysis Archive Test PQRS TUV HI Turbine gas meter type TRZ 03 E 7 211 Ser No 7 8 0 80 03 Totali Mod ID Select Al otalizer lode elec Scar Ultrasonic gas meter type USZ 08 7 241 Ser No 01 04 Z Nr 058950 4 Front panel with main plate main seal and seal diagram gez Eckert RMG MESSTECHNIK GMBH ERZ 2002 densi
69. value shown will be the maximum value of the current day To access the current day press Enter Max hourly value per day You can scroll to the right or left Uncorr vol M Vm lt gt Vb lt gt E lt gt Vo lt gt Vmc 3000 m3 02 07 2005 10h S and back to Vm If you press the Cursor Up key once you will reach the oldest entry in the archive If you press the Cursor Up key once again you will reach the second oldest entry in the archive etc If you continue to press the Cursor Up key you will reach the most recent entry depending on the depth of the archive If you continue to press the Cursor Up key you will return to the current entry If you press the Cursor Down key the procedure will be the same in the other direction The depths of the individual archives are as follows Maximum hourly values per day 180 entries Maximum hourly values per month 24 entries Maximum hourly values per year 2 entries Maximum daily values per month 24 entries Maximum daily values per year 2 entries 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 10 1 Example for testing Input frequency f 230 Hz Action Reading out the archive on November 10 2004 at 10 01 o clock Date Time Vm Time Vb 08 11 04 14 00 498 14 00 2185 NEZ 09 11 04 12 00 498 12 00 2185 66 10 1 1 04 09 00 498 09 00 2185 Three maximum values were stored on Nov 8 2004 at 14 00 o clock on Nov 9 2004 at 12 00 o clock and mE on Nov 10 2004 at 9 0
70. with pulse output usen eene nnne 53 3 3 2 Linking check totalizers with pulse 54 3 3 3 Implementing 88 only eene eene nnne 55 3 3 4 Connecting an external modem sese nennen nennen senten nennen netten 55 3 3 5 Time synchronization via PTB time service eese nennen 56 3 3 6 MES TDI E 56 3 3 7 Deleting archives logbooks change memories 57 1 met 58 3 4 1 X Distribution of unassigned inputs and outputs archive group 10 58 3 4 2 Triggering a freeze esent 59 3 4 3 Changing the direction billing mode seen eene 59 3 5 Programmable archive archive group 9 esee eene eene 60 3 6 Determining the correction factors for calibrating the current inputs 60 iuc TRU 61 3 7 1 FROME COM Hees cosscexi M 61 3 7 2 Rear panel COM 1 to COM Sivscc ccsssssevesccesscsbtsecsonscstesnsssaescaccssessssdzascssstacaovazacessvonsesanaxees 61 3 7 9 Rear panel CAN DUS e nee e caosa aser evene ee ao Ra Een eei Paene nn 62 3 7 4 Rear panel
71. 0 B 3 COM operating mode Modbus RTU Test mode for internal purposes only B 4 Baud rate COM2 9600 193 B 5 B P S COM2 8 COM 2 for DZU RTU ASCII modbus GPS 170 RMGView Modbus test for internal purposes only B 6 2 operating mode OFF M B 7 Baud rate COM3 9600 8E1 B 8 COM 3 for DSfG master RTU ASCII modbus B 9 COMG operating mode Modbus RTU RMG bus output Test mode for internal purposes only B 10 Baud rate COM4 9600 4 for DSfG RMG bus bus output i DIS Test mode for internal purposes only B 12 operating mode DSfG 13 Baud rate Vo 2400 Internal COM for Vo ENCO totalizer B 14 B P S v B 15 Vo operating mode Vo Shared timeout for gas quality ie _ 1 eee GUEY Register offset setting for the modbus B 17 Register offset 2000 EER Shared modbus address valid for COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 TCP IP B 19 Baud rate 5 eg COM 5 with modem and permanent line B 20 B P S 5 8N m settings for modem connection external B 21 COM5 operating mode modem e g RDT for DSfG B 0 Modbus addresses that deviate from shared B 23 Modbus addr COM2 0 address B18 Modbus addr COM3 pO Modbus address of a FLOWSICK ultrasound Tr meter 26 IP Modbus Timeout 5 B 27 Modbus project m The coordinates enable the project specific configuration of the modbus registers fro
72. 0 o clock At 10 02 o clock raise the input frequency f from 230 Hz to 253 Hz Action Reading out the archive on November 10 2004 at 11 01 o clock Date Time Vm Time Vb 08 1 1 04 14 00 498 14 00 2185 09 11 04 12 00 498 12 00 2185 10 11 04 11 00 548 11 00 5206 The hourly value of 9 00 o clock was overwritten with the higher value of 11 00 o clock At 11 02 o clock reduce the input frequency f from 253 Hz to 200 Hz Action Reading out the archive on November 20 2004 at 12 01 o clock Date Time Vm Time Vb 08 1 1 04 14 00 498 14 00 2185 09 11 04 12 00 498 12 00 2185 10 11 04 11 00 548 11 00 5206 The hourly value of 11 00 o clock has remained unchanged 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 10 2 Option for checking the maximum value storage function To check the maximum value storage function see the Maximum values chapter Press 5 Archive and then the Cursor Left key once to reach the maximum values per day month or year Here you can find also an option for checking the operation of the maximum value storage function at shorter intervals For this purpose use the maximum minute values within one hour displayed for the volumes at measurement and base conditions energy and mass No special test mode is used but the original procedure of valuation and storage of maximum values at one minute intervals with the actual input values and quantities is shown You can find this in the Checking maximum values chapter 67 D
73. 0 response factors Access Line Designation Value Unit Fields M 01 to IM 11 1 methane 0 00 The quality of calibration can be assessed by means of the response 2 ethane 0 00 factors 3 propane 0 00 4 i butane 0 00 73 5 n butane 0 00 EL 6 0 00 7 0 00 8 neo pentane 0 00 9 hexanet 0 00 10 0 00 nitrogen 0 00 11 D 12 Quality Doubtful IN GC6000 cylinder rack and control panel Input fields N 01 to IN 06 Assigning an input contact for monitoring the minimum limits for pressure and temperature of the calibration gas cylinders and the room temperature of the GC c 5 Access Line Designation Value Defining an input contact as calibration contact TIL Fields N 08 to IN 14 Displaying the function linked to an input contact The external control panel has four LEDs visualizing the operation of the GC 6000 Fields N 15 to IN 18 show the statuses of these LEDs 4 GC 6000 FJ File system Access Line Designation Value Unit The long term archive is located on menia RO the internal memory card The status of the memory card can be checked B 2 capacity warn ee by means of the FJ fields 74 5 totalmemory 1297 MByte D avalable memory 116 MByte Generally the following applies to the coordinate fields above Fields without specific commen
74. 08 4 08 5 08 9 09 0 09 1 09 2 09 3 09 4 09 5 09 9 10 8 10 9 11 0 11 1 12 0 12 1 12 2 sd param error R loss R lt l alarm lim R gt up alarm lim R jump R I warn lim R up warn lim R comp error Acc puls gt max Vo alarm R param error Hs loss Hs lt l alarm lim Hs gt up alarm lim Hs jump Hs lt l warn lim Hs gt up warn lim Hs param error CO2 loss CO2 l alarm lim CO2 gt up alarm lim CO2 jump CO2 I warn lim CO2 gt up warn lim CO2 param error VSM loss VSM lt l alarm lim VSM gt up alarm lim VSM jump VSM lt l warn lim VSM gt up warn lim VSM param error H2 loss H2 l alarm lim H2 gt up alarm lim H2 jump H2 l warn lim H2 gt up warn lim H2 param error Def channel 1 Def channel 2 Start up gt max Slow down gt max VSB loss VSB I alarm lim VSB gt up alarm lim Inconsistent parameterization standard density Loss of density Density below lower alarm limit Density exceeds upper alarm limit Density gradient exceeds maximum Density below lower warning limit Density exceeds upper warning limit Incorrect density calculation Too many temporarily stored pulses with open calibration lock Vo failure effect of fault alarm Inconsistent parameterization density Loss of superior calorific value Superior calorific value below lower alarm limit Superior calorific value exceeds upper alarm limit Superior calorific value gradient exceeds maximum Superior calorific value
75. 162 A 29 ED Parameter access ERES Function of the revision switch Sets the revision bit in the bit string for the corrector Marks archive entries and standard queries Pulse outputs are deactivated when revision is active Code words 1 and 2 divide the user code into two groups of 4 so that the supplier and purchaser can be separated for example Access Line Designation B 1 Revision mode Indicates the current access protection e Closed Single user code Double user code Calibration lock Superuser Adjustable time until Code or Superuser access protection is closed automatically A 30 EE Display Selection of the visualization levels Available options include German influences the information content shown English and Russian on the display and in HTML downloads Access Line Designation Governs whether more detailed B 1 Language information DSfG modbus access etc on the current coordinates is Sse shown in the fourth line of the display 163 B 3 Screen saver Display refresh speed B 4 Information line p z Available options include Comma and Period B 5 Display update rarely m B 8 Buzzer mode OFF B 9 M li no Operating mode of the Piezo beeper essage line b Governs whether a pending error report is shown in the fourth line of the display B 13 Coordinates no Vi yes coordinat
76. 2 No 176 H 46 0 Cont param error Parameterization of contact input double seizing 1 No 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 e OESTE a a GE z z z gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt lt gt gt gt gt gt 46 1 46 2 46 3 46 4 46 5 46 6 46 7 46 8 47 0 47 1 47 2 47 3 47 4 47 5 47 6 47 7 47 8 47 9 48 0 48 1 48 2 48 3 48 4 48 5 48 6 48 7 50 0 50 1 50 2 50 3 50 4 50 5 50 6 50 8 51 0 51 1 51 2 51 3 51 4 51 5 51 6 51 7 51 8 Vo defective Vo timeout Vo protocol Deleted pulses I9 inp param 110 inp param 111 inp param 112 inp param Qm lt l warn lim Qm gt up warn lim Qmc lt l warn lim Qmc gt up warn lim Qb lt l warn lim Qb gt up warn lim Qe lt l warn lim Qe gt up warn lim Qms lt l warn lim Qms gt up warn lim CAN timeout Def modem Factory state PT1 open circ PT2 open circ C fact failure PT3 inp param PT4 inp param T lt gt GERG lim P lt gt GERG lim rd lt gt GERG lim CO2 lt gt GERG lim N2 lt gt GERG lim Hs lt gt GERG lim H2 lt gt GERG lim GERG iter max T lt AGA limit P lt gt AGA limit rd lt gt AGA limit CO2 lt gt AGA lim
77. 20 mA limit mode the alarm limit parameters include also an assignment 0 mA or 4 mA to the lower adjusting value or an assignment 20 mA to the upper adjusting value If alarm limits and range limits are to be set separately from each other use the 0 or 4 20mA coefficient operating mode 3 2 8 1 Signal processing of the HART input temperature Base functions of the HART input Reading the measured value Reading the measured value in burst mode Searching the address Evaluating faults Evaluating Config Flag Multimaster protocol Analog and digital communications are possible at the same time 3 2 8 2 Reference temperture temperature at base conditions If the coefficient is calculated in accordance with 88 or AGA NX 19 with group gas the temperature at base conditions can only be changed step by step according to the ISO table of countries 0 15 20 25 degrees C From ISO DIS 12213 3 page 32 Reference pressure 101 325 kPa 1 01325 barabs Country Hs reference temperature C Temperature at base conditions C combustion gas measurement User specific setting 0 15 20 25 0 15 20 25 If the K coefficient is calculated in accordance with GERG 888 or if K constant is selected the Hs reference temperature can be changed only step by step according to the ISO table of countries 0 15 20 25 degrees C 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR Example ISO DIS 12213 3
78. 3 4 5 6 lt JA Mess PT Analyse Blende Ei Archiv Test Z hl Durch Z hler Modus Typ Auswahl Alarm werke fluss schild OL schen PQRS TUV WXYZ COM F Sicherungsmarke 35 pTZ Volume Conversion ser no C woo DE 11 MIO02 PTB003 tam 25 C 55 C EN 12405 1 05 30 Belastungsregistriergerat Messtechnik GmbH RMG Butzbach German ie y CY Device Type ERZ nO year RMG Messtechnik GmbH Butzbach Germany www rmg com Phone 49 0 6033 897 0 248 Frontplatte mit Hauptschild MID Plombenplan Zustands Mengenumwerter ERZ2004 mit H chstbelastungs Anzeigegerat ET2000 Front view with nameplate MID and seal placement Volume corrector ERZ2004 with integrated data logger ET2000 Sicherungsmarke seal drw no 063190 4 drawn Ramshaw date 12 04 2011 ANNEX 249 35 RMG ES Volume Conversion MESS FLOW COMPUTER SYSTEM ERZ 2104 Device Type EE o O Netz C w OM DE 41 MIO02 PTB003 Sicherungsmarke lessung tam 25 55 EN 12405 1 seal Additional Function 7 732 Energy Conversion Device O Warnung acc EN12405 2 9580 Belastungsregistriergerat O Alarm RMG Messtechnik GmbH Butzbach Germany 2 4 3 P 6 Drahtplombe Eingabe lead seal Mess PTT Analyse Blende Archiv Test ER
79. 8 9 gt Zahl Durch Z hler Modus Typ Auswahl Alarm werke fluss schild OL schen Sicherungsmarke seal drw no 063191 4 drawn Ramshaw Frontplatte mit Hauptschild MID Plombenplan RMG Messtechnik GmbH Brennwert Mengenumwerter ERZ2104 mit H chstbelastungs Anzeigegerat ET2000 dE Front view with nameplate MID and seal placement date 12 04 2011 Energy corrector ERZ2104 with integrated data logger ET2000 ANNEX gt lt o o o Sicherungsmarke seal COMI 24VDC Siz2At 90 230VAC Si 1A CES 5 CES RMG Messtechnik GmbH Butzbach Germany www rmg com Phone 49 0 6033 897 0 290 lo lolz ojx amp 0 0 0 00000000 seal 00000000 00000000 000000000 lt 000000000 00000000000 00000000000 5 x lt N gt lt gt lt a o o COM2 COM3 Ethernet SS cs ES R ckseite Plombenplan drw no 0631924 Zustands Mengenumwerter ERZ2004 mit H chstbelastungs Anzeigeger t ET2000 drawn Ramshaw Brennwert Mengenumwerter ERZ2104 mit H chstbelastungs Anzeigeger t Et2000 checked Rear view seal placement date 05 04 2011 Volume corrector ERZ2004 with integrated data logger ET2000 Energy corrector ERZ2104 with integrated data logger ET2000 ANNEX 251 Sicherungsmarke seal L
80. 9 No of digits parameter and select the desired representation mode there From software version 1 7 there are CO2 totalizers for all the four billing modes Note To make these settings the topmost access level superuser has to be enabled i e the user code has to be entered and the calibration lock has to be open 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 2 2 How to change over measured values to another unit Measured values such as pressure temperature superior calorific value etc can be changed over to another unit without an automatic conversion being performed In contrast to totalizers the assignment of the minimum and maximum values determines the calculation of the physical quantity from the input value Thus changing the unit means merely changing the text For example you want to change the pressure at measurement conditions displayed from bar to psi activate the superuser access level i e input the user code and open the calibration lock After you have pressed 1 Meas P T the following display appears 27 bar The arrow is located on the first line and can be moved upwards or downwards using the cursor keys In this kWh m3 example pressing Enter will select the Pressure chapter A kg m3 new window will open with the Absolute Pressure heading 8 The contents of this chapter can be browsed using the cursor keys Use the Cursor Down key to browse to the Unit function Then press Enter
81. 96 3 P2 3 32 3 12e 15 12 3 7 4 n2 4 nc 4 P2 40 2 4 12 4 15 4 0 02 4 4e 5 3 5 7 5 e P3 5 33 5 13e 16 5 583 5 16 5 se e3 5 n7 e P3 e 53 13e 16 lt 13 lt GO jae 7 04 7 7 4 7 34 7 1 7 t2 7 14 17 lute Lu 7 i amp A8 P4 54 us 6 125 9 4 9 u 9 F1 9 0 tis 3 125 05 9 0 jw 6 AL 10 9 855 t1 10 2 10 mB5 30 6 U o bas T of of e I ea E e L X16 cons T N X18 e d e 9 T e 24UDC Sj 2At 90 230UAC Si 1A PEN De 19 8 eae eae asc 5 6 CET 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 11 2 2 Assignment of terminals X16 Connection of the supply voltage In accordance with the device design either alternating voltage 90 to 230 V to L N and PE with fuse 1A or direct voltage 24 V to and PE with fuse 2 At is to be connected to X 16 The following assignment of terminals applies to the ERZ 2000 without an internal isolating device Ex 1 NAMUR 2 V 1 or V2 X1 Terminal 1 Transistor output 1 Terminal 2 Transistor output 1 Terminal 3 Transistor output 2
82. A 86 LL Monitoring of synchronous run Access Line Designation Termination quantity reference variable for comparison Termination short reference variable 219 used together with the termination p quantity from line 6 after an error report to reduce the time until the system is activated again after rectification of the fault Activation of synchronous run monitoring A 87 LN Original totalizer encoder totalizer terminal X4 or X9 Access Line Designation Value Unit 2 Current tot reading 000000 m3 x e Vo tot status DEM eT D 6 Mexoydequentiy 000000 D 7 Vodirection D Cument mesamp O D 9 Lasttimestamp Os 10 Manufacturer Automatic input of type plate data provided the sensor delivers this data within the defined frame of the telegram 1 Device type 12 Serial number 13 Vo year of constr 14 Software version SS 0 1 1 Vo tot unit EIN Reaction to a Vo transmitter rotating in reverse Two options are available Rev forbidden and Rev permitted a A 88 Digital totalizer transmission ultrasonic flow meter Access Line Designation Value Unit immediately immediately single counter Display of diagnostic information associated with a connected US 9000 computer with main totalizer function A 89 LP Setting totalizers Access Line Designation Value Unit Q 2 V
83. ATION Program source All c h and make files c is divided into a official sections b non official sections 16 makeich Program with feature for categorizing all sources associated with the project official not official The following results are generated ident htm readable file _ _ kenn hhh machine readable kenn hhh is an automatically generated source compiled together with the corrector kenn hhh contains Checksum first checksum time of last modification and version number of the official kernel Compilation and linking process The executable corrector program ERZ2000 exe is available as a result of the compilation and linking process This program calculates the checksum independently second checksum It also knows the first checksum and an algorithm for calculating the ACTUAL activation key It knows a locked calibration parameter into which the TARGET activation key must be entered Copies for the production of flow correctors are made using this program Approval documents with TARGET activation key Copies Copies Input of the TARGET Copies activation key under calibration lock Copies TARGET ACTUAL activation key comparison no activation if key is incorrect corrector operates in alarm mode only and counts 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 7 Adjusting the device to the transmitter data 2 7 1 Pressure sensor The data of th
84. Configuration El 20 A violation of the limits only results in a warning disturbance totalizers are not actuated The function for CO2 is shown here as an example for all components A 9 BB Carbon dioxide Access Line Designation Value Unit Link to input value here table B 5 Default 2 00000 mol B 6 Lower warning limit 0 00000 mol 7 Upper warning limit 20 00000 mol T 7 ee 2 The source is deactivated because table operating mode is used in this example EM MEM D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D T MEME TUO GRAM Timeout 18000 s 21 Base value 1 9100 mol 22 Mean for DSfG 1 9100 mol 23 Mass fraction 4 5131 Gew 24 Volume fraction 1 9038 Vol 25 Standard fraction 1 9771 kg m3 26 Root of B 0 083008 27 Current status Fixed value 28 DSfG status Fixed value 29 Used range 0 00000 mol There is a drag indicator function for all measured values which is separate Bits Min for min and max peak values 32 Max drag indicaor 1 9100 mol The contents of the drag indicator can 33 Current gradient 0 00000 mol s be reset selectively press the Enter key or globally in the display 34 Second mean 1 9100 mol function 35 Minute mean 1 9100 mol 36 Hourly mean 1 9100 mol 37 Ongoing mean 1 9100 mol Std deviation 0 00000 mol E TE EM D 43 Running timeout D 44 Unnorm mol fraction 1 9100 mol D 47 Revision mean
85. DEM available the ERZ 2000 can use PTB s time service and synchronize its clock and that of all users of the bus with its integrated remote data transmission feature In PTB criterion operating mode conforming to PTB the clock can be synchronized only once a day if the calibration lock is closed The synchronization window is 20 seconds If there are greater deviations the clock will no longer be put back or forward This applies to synchronization via the synchronization input and the synchronization telegrams DSfG bus In coordinate KC3 Time sync rule there are the following three operating modes PTB criterion The synchronization window is 20 seconds PTB crit light As above 20 seconds plus recovery of a missed changeover to summer time Always Every time sync telegram will be evaluated and accepted Other operating modes are possible See the relevant function press 0 Mode and then six times the Cursor Right key to browse to the Times chapter In KA Times there are the general displays and parameters In KB Time contact signal to external devices there are all displays and parameters which are important for the time signal to external devices i e if the ERZ 2000 itself is the source for the time signal 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR In KC External time signal there are all displays and parameters which are important for receiving the time signal The clock operates on the UTC coordinated universal time
86. DSfG bus The master operates fully autonomously without a cross connection to other entities on the ERZ2000 IE 03 State of modem Indicates the current state of the modem Stopped Emergency state if the modem state machine runs out of control In such cases it ensures that a potentially open telephone connection is terminated and blocks any further telephone activities until the ERZ2000 is restarted Initialization The modem initialization string E 06 is sent The system waits for a response from the modem Waiting for modem The system waits for a response after the modem is initialized If the response is positive the modem is ready If the response is negative response is received the initialization process is repeated If the modem still fails to respond a message H48 1 Def modem indicating that the modem is defect or off is issued if DSfG RDT is active E 01 not set to off IE 03 State of modem continued Acknowledgment Intermediate step syntactically correct acknowledgment of modem detected Modem ready Initialization was successful The modem now responds to incoming calls Triggers for outgoing calls are processed PTB time service The trigger for handling the PTB time service is processed The following messages appear Carrier signal modem comes 5 PTB s telephone time service time has been detected comes if PTB time service was detected 6 Old time new time if time adjustment was necessary The mes
87. ERS FAULT TEXTS 130 H 36 5 GC6000 propane Propane PV2 high low alarm 2 No 131 H 36 6 GC6000 i butane l butane PV3 high low alarm 2 No 132 H 36 7 GC6000 N butane N butane PV4 high low alarm 2 No 133 H 37 0 GC6000 Neo P neo Pentane PV5 high low alarm 2 No 134 H 37 1 GC6000 i pentane lpentane PV6 high low alarm 2 No 135 H 37 2 GC6000 N pentane N pentane PV7 high low alarm 2 No 136 H 37 3 GC6000 N2 Nitrogen PV8 high low alarm 2 No EX 137 H 37 4 GC6000 methane Methane PV9 high low alarm 2 No 104 138 H 37 5 GC6000 CO2 CO2 PV 10 high low alarm 2 No 139 H 37 6 GC6000 ethane Ethane PV 11 high low alarm 2 No 140 H 37 7 GC6000 heatval Heat value PV 12 high low alarm 2 No 141 H 38 0 GC6000 density Density PV 13 high low alarm 2 No 142 H 38 1 GC6000 Wobbe Wobbe index PV 14 high low alarm 2 No 143 H 38 2 GC6000 compresf Compressibility factor PV 15 high low alarm 2 No 144 H 38 3 GC6000 ICV ICV PV 19 high low alarm 2 No 145 H 38 4 GC6000 rel dens Relative density PV20 high low alarm 2 No 146 H 38 5 GC6000 reserve 1 reserve 1 2 No 147 H 38 6 GC6000 reserve 2 reserve 2 2 No 148 H 38 7 GC6000 reserve 3 reserve 3 2 No 149 W 39 0 GC6000 comm err GC6000 Kommunikationsfehler 2 No 150 W 39 1 cyl C1 temp Cylinder temperature calibration gas 1 2 No 151 W 39 2 cyl C2 temp Cylinder temperature calibration gas 2 2 No 152 W 39 3 cyl C 1 press Cylinder pressure calibration gas 1 2 No 153 W 39 4 cyl C2 pr
88. ERZ 2004M Superior calorific value corrector with mass calculation ERZ 2104M Density corrector with mass calculation ERZ 2002M Density corrector energy with mass calculation ERZ 2102M Orifice plate flowcomputer ERZ 2114 2112 1 INTRODUCTION 1 3 Performance features 19 design plug in unit with 42 depth units half the width of 19 4Jine fluorescent display in blue colour Control keyboard with 19 keys of which the numbered keys from 0 to 9 have more than one function they are function keys in normal display mode here the marking below the relevant key applies and in input mode they are used to input digits or in extended mode letters for entering texts System status warning and alarm indications LEDs on the front panel 3 Sealable calibration switch Serial data interfaces on the front and rear panels TCP IP Ethernet interface on the rear side RS 485 bus interfaces for DS G and MODBUS CAN bus on the rear side 2 channel volume input with pulse counting and frequency measurement Volume input for digitally operating Vo totalizers 8 analog inputs comprising one pressure measuring input for analog signals and the HART protocol one temperature measuring input for resistance measurement up to three signals for differential pressure measuring cells and spare inputs dispatcher pulse outputs 4 analog current outputs 4 frequency inputs Time system with automatic switching to daylig
89. External S RAM Ferro RAM RTC Power supply Signal conditioner filtering Debug interface Ethernet CAN B COM 5 RS232 COM 1 COM 2 COM3 4 HART Vo encoder Volume input Digital inputs Analog inputs PT 100 1000 Pulse outputs Analog outputs Alarm Warning Digital outputs Optional Ex interface 135 Annex A Coordinate system This annex describes contains the most important parts of the coordinate system Additional comments have been added for coordinates that are particularly important or require explanation 136 The availability of coordinates and columns depends on the selected user profile Only with the developer setting are all coordinates visible Example presentation E e Access Line Designation Value Unit Access rights Description of symbols in the Access column Displayed value Parameter locked by the user Special case code number General display values Locked calibration parameter Freeze value Parameter for units and formats Interface variable measurement Interface variable type plates e g USZ or HART sensor Constant or fixed parameter Self altering input value protected by the user e g time Self altering input value without protection e g drag indicator maximum value Parameter with special lock Self altering input value with official protection Totalizers Nx D DAS Semon eS The coordinate system runs horizontally from AA to QX c
90. Flow Computer Series ERZ 2000 pm OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Serving the Gas Industry Worldwide by Honeywell STATUS MAY 2012 Note Unfortunately paperwork does not automatically update itself but technical developments are constantly being made Therefore we reserve the right to change the descriptions and statements contained in our operating instructions without prior notice However you can conveniently download the most recent version of this manual and those of other devices from our website WWW rmg com RMG Messtechnik GmbH Otto Hahn Str 5 Phone numbers 35510 Butzbach Germany Switchboard 49 0 6033 897 0 Fax 49 0 6033 897 130 Customer Service 49 0 6033 897 127 E mail Messtechnik Honeywell com Spare Parts 49 0 6033 897 173 CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION ere Ue 1 1 1 Overview Regie ire 1 1 2 of ApPPlC ARON mp 2 1 3 Performance Tedblileb 3 Device sui e MM 4 iS SGOMMENC EI c 5 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION rei etiatn erat r etel iita dap 6 MES CU Ee RIAL UT er S 6 2 2 Coordinate system levels and rights of access visibility levels 7 2 2 1 Goordlliate oes esee sauce neces 7 2 2 2 Levels and rights Ot ACCESS 8 2 2 3 LEVELS sisi 9 2 2 4 Enterin
91. Format adjustments only possible in D 35 Minute mean 79 997 Bar superuser mode D 36 Hourly mean 79 997 Bar D 37 Ongoing mean 79 997 Bar Type plate data for pressure sensors D 38 Standard deviation 0 000 Bar must always be entered at the end of D a7 men 79 997 Bar a function block column in the sensor data The ERZ 2000 D retain value 79 997 bar automatically adopts the text in the O ea Installing the ex card possible from version 1 3 extends the selection options in the Source menu line 16 An intrinsically safe connection is possible both for the PT 100 in 4 wire technology and temperature sensors with a 4 20mA signal or even HART configuration 138 The pressure sensor can also be connected as a 4 20mA transmitter or HART sensor with an intrinsically safe degree of protection Corresponding settings must be configured in the Source menu The connections are then situated at terminals X9 and X10 see manual for more information A 2 AC Gas temperature Access Line Designation Value Unit mMET MEN PT100 500 1000 different temperature sensors B 5 Default 12 00 96 6 Lower warning limit 4500 m 7 Upper warning limit 550 m Hom omeno es cae cate BU EUN EUR Resistance 1 i calculated in the unit of the measured
92. GA limits Other AGA errors AGA interim result pi tau exceed limits Error during calculation of interpolation point Illegal operating mode Pulse counting channel 1 implausible Pulse counting channel 2 implausible Tc Tb combination not permitted Supply voltage failure Pulse counting channel 3 implausible Pulse counting channel 4 implausible Standard density seconde input value failed Namur module A analog digital converter Namur module A overload Namur module A open circuit PT100 Vn Vn Vn Vn P Vn P Vn P Vn P Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Gbh Vn Gbh Vb Vn Vb Vn Vb Vn Vb Vn P T Vn Vn T Vn P Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Vn T Vn P Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Vn P T Vn Vb Vn Vb Vn Vb Vn Vn Vb Vn Vb Vn Vn Gbh Vn P T Vn P T Vn T 87 88 6 MODBUS 71 7 71 8 72 0 72 1 72 2 72 3 72 4 77 0 77 1 77 2 77 3 77 4 77 5 77 6 7727 78 2 78 3 78 4 78 5 78 6 80 0 80 1 80 2 80 4 80 5 80 6 81 0 83 6 83 7 84 0 84 1 84 2 84 6 89 0 89 1 89 2 89 6 91 8 93 5 93 6 95 0 95 1 95 2 96 0 96 1 96 2 96 3 OC mainch NMA OC ref ch NMB ADC NMB overload NMB OC PT100 NMB OC Messk NMB OC Vgl k DP1 1 lt DP2 1 lt 1 lt 3 DP1 failure DP2 failure DP3 failure DP gt max GQM list Main GQ unknown Ref GQ unknown Main GQ CRC 12 Ref GQ CRC 12 dkvk gt max IGM SV invalid Path failure gt max
93. H4 loss CH4 I alarm lim CH4 gt up alarm lim CH4 jump Comp normaliz CH4 GC timeout CH4 GC alarm VOS corr error AGA8 alarm AGA892DC alarm 6 3 Modbus EGO This is a special interface which has been specifically created for Erdgas Ostschweiz There are the following EGO specific Modbus registers Register Bytes 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 2016 2018 2020 2022 2024 2026 2028 2030 2032 4 NFP FFP FKP 5 HHH HP HHH SF Data type Access Col Line unsigned integer 32 bit R IP unsigned integer 32 bit R IP unsigned integer 32 bit R IP unsigned integer 32 bit R IP unsigned integer 32 bit R IP unsigned integer 32 bit R IP float IEEE 754 R IP float IEEE 754 R IP float IEEE 754 R IP float IEEE 754 R W IP float IEEE 754 R W IP float IEEE 754 R W IP float IEEE 754 R W IP float IEEE 754 R IP float IEEE 754 R IP float IEEE 754 R IP unsigned integer 16 bit R IP 1 AN Ao 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 No more signal from standard density transmitter No more signal from relative density transmitter No more signal from CO2 transmitter No more signal from N2 transmitter No more signal from H2 transmitter GC reports loss of superior calorific value GC reports loss of standard density GC reports loss of relative density GC reports loss of carbon dioxide GC reports loss of nitrogen GC reports loss of hydrogen Beattie amp Bridgeman iteration is running amok Loss of methane Methane belo
94. H64 9 DSfG broadcast DSfG checksum incorrect broadcast telegram H65 0 DSfG broadc ign DSfG broadcast telegram ignored H65 1 DSfG bus term DSfG missing bus termination The cause of the messages may originate from own device but may also originate from another bus device It should never be assumed that the device displaying the message is the exact cause of the problem IF 07 User pattern Bit pattern auxiliary variable each bit corresponds to an external device The lowest value bit corresponds to the DSfG address A This bit and F 07 combine to produce F 01 IF 08 Address pattern Bit pattern auxiliary variable each bit corresponds to an internal device The lowest value bit corresponds to the DSfG address A This bit and F 06 combine to produce F 01 71 IG Imported gas quality via DSfG IG 01 to IG 08 Measured value as received via DSfG Make sure that the original input value appears here e g if the PGC is being revised the measured value for the test gas appears here This value is only used for correction in the ERZ2004 following various plausibility checks and filters for the measured value If the DSfG telegram does not contain the original measured value it is replaced by the physically meaningless value 1 and marked as unavailable IG 09 to IG 23 The complete gas analysis can only be obtained using the AGA8 compatible standard query dlc See also G 37 If the component is not incl
95. Instead all the addresses that do not have a device allocated are systematically polled New or lost devices arrive at the DSfG bus faster as a result Mixture Combination of both of the strategies described above The control station operates on COMS Ensure that the settings for the baud rate data bits parity and stop bits for COM4 DSfG slave entities are the same IF 03 Double EOT Traditional control stations send 2 EOTs The second EOT is syntactical but not essential Omission of the second EOT increases the polling speed by 20 without increasing the susceptibility to failure or the system load of the bus It is currently unclear whether all external devices as well as old devices function reliably when the second EOT is omitted IF 04 Polling time Traditional control stations wait 7 msec between two polling operations Decreasing this time drastically increases the polling speed However the system load on the DSfG slaves increases just as drastically It is currently unclear whether all external devices as well as old devices function reliably when the waiting time is decreased IF 06 DSfG fault Auxiliary variable for transporting information from lower DSfG protocol layers for fault evaluation If the parameter JD 01 is set to YES the following messages are activated H64 6 DSfG unex char DSfG unexpected characters in the telegram H64 7 DSfG overflow DSfG buffer overflow H64 8 DSfG checksum DSfG checksum incorrect
96. MG bus master COM 4 interface Switchable from RS 232 without handshake to RS 485 conforming to the DSfG interface The DSfG function for corrector and recording entities or the RMG bus function can be assigned The DSfG interface implemented in the ERZ 2000 complies with the current version of the DSfG technical specification for volume correctors Within the scope of this documentation we assume that the DSfG interface is known Further documentation can be obtained from the DVGW There is a separate description for the RMG bus It is used in conjunction with RMG process gas chromatographs GC 9000 instead of the DSfG interface OFF Test DSfG RMG bus RMG bus master COM 5 interface RS 232 with handshake plus carrier plus ring Usable for MODEM RDT If a modem with TSC is connected Dedicated line has to be selected in coordinate IB 21 3 7 3 Rear panel CAN bus A CAN bus connection is optionally available which can be used for customer specific or plant specific extensions No function is stored at the moment 3 7 4 Rear panel Ethernet Network connection for various applications Linking of devices integration into customer networks Intranet or as important issues the remote operation and visualization of the ERZ 2000 with a laptop Here a separate description is available see the operating instructions for the ERZ 2000_Remote_Operation MODBUS RTU on TCP IP with the same parameters of COM 1 or COM 3 Modbus setting
97. MG13 Value MGO01 Counters e g 2 JUUUUL 5 pulses is no special operating mode for activating the check totalizers 0 They are supplied from the corresponding frequency inputs are active if a check evaluation not equal to zero is parameterized and pulses arrive at the input 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 3 3 Implementing a GERG 88S only computer If a ERZ 2000 must be parameterized in such a way that only the K coefficient calculation is to be used according to 88 and the individual components are ignored the components that are not required must be switched off OFF mode However since the ERZ 2000 always calculates all equations including the AGA 8 92 DC it requires at least one methane value to calculate a set of consistent data that the AGA 8 92 DC can then use For this reason the ERZ 2000 performs the following internal calculation automatically It adopts methane with 100 and calculates methane minus the defaults preset for the GERG or measured values 55 Example An EMC 500 is connected that only delivers the fuel gas value the standard density and CO coefficient mode is set 88 while the operating mode for the other components is set to OFF 100 CO CH4 The ERZ 2000 uses the value for CH4 and CO to perform a normalization process and generate a data set of 21 components which are then used for the AGA 8 92 DC 3 3 4 Connect
98. Mx time revision 30 7 3600 B 59 uncompl Msg show A 75 IL GC6000 Access Line Designation Value Unit Communication with the analyzer must start within 5 minutes Counter for flushing procedures From this value the analyzer calculates the number of calibration runs and the number of flushing procedures to be carried out beforehand Max number of analyses for delaying calibration after a restart Counter for analyses until calibration after a restart yes will activate the recording of gas quality data in the long term archive The archive is located on the internal l 35 Total raw 0 00000 mol memory card The status of the 36 Oven temperature 0 00 C memory card can be checked via FJ File system 37 Carrier gas press 0 00 kPa 38 Interface state Restart 39 GC6000 Error Map 00000000 Hex GC6000 valve state 0000 Hex Status of the values in the DSfG hive QH AG8 GC6000 GBH DEREN BN i D 46 DSGsols Stop A 76 Access Line Designation 11 Doom A 77 Access Line 1 SI oom exu icon Is e Methane Ethane Propane l butane N butane l pentane N pentane Neo Pentane Carbon dioxide Nitrogen Designation Value Unit 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 IM GC6000 Response faktor Value 3 Fields M 01 to IM
99. Path 7 VOS implausible Path 8 VOS implausible Main Reference GOM via Modbus is uncomplete Counter main channel HFX malfunction Counter reference channel HFY malfunction Loss of isentropic coefficient Isentropic coefficient below lower alarm limit Isentropic coefficient exceeds upper alarm limit Isentropic coefficient below lower warning limit Isentropic coefficient exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization isentropic coefficient Isentropic coefficient gradient exceeds maximum Extra hint 1 with changeable short text Extra hint 2 with changeable short text Extra hint 3 with changeable short text Extra hint 4 with changeable short text Extra hint 5 with changeable short text Extra hint 6 with changeable short text Extra hint 7 with changeable short text Extra hint 8 with changeable short text Extra warning 1 with changeable short text Extra warning 2 with changeable short text Extra warning 3 with changeable short text Extra warning 4 with changeable short text Extra warning 5 with changeable short text Extra warning 6 with changeable short text Extra warning 7 with changeable short text Extra warning 8 with changeable short text Extra alarm 1 with changeable short text Extra alarm 2 with changeable short text Extra alarm 3 with changeable short text Extra alarm 4 with changeable short text Extra alarm 5 with changeable short text Extra alarm 6 with changeable short text Extra alarm 7 with changeable short t
100. RRECTOR current for test purposes which is independent of a measured value Enter the desired value in the Test current parameter and activate it under Operating mode The same is valid for current outputs 2 3 and 4 3 2 12 2 Pulse outputs Press 4 1 0 and browse downwards until you reach the Pulse output 1 to 4 chapters There all important values for parameterization and display are combined By using the relevant features all appropriate data 48 calculated values etc can be selected and thus mapped on the pulse output Outputs The arrow is located on the second line and can be moved gt Pulse output 1 upwards or downwards using the cursor keys In this Pulse output 2 example pressing Enter will select the Pulse output 1 chapter A new window will open with the Pulse output 1 heading The contents of this chapter can be browsed using the cursor keys Pulse output 3 The same is valid for pulse outputs 2 3 and 4 There are the following Selection options Volume at measurement conditions Corrected volume at measurement conditions Volume at base conditions Energy flow rate Mass totalizer Vo totalizer Cycle pulses Test pulses duration Test pulses groups OFF Test pulses There are two options for outputting test pulses 1 A specified number of pulses per second is permanently outputted duration 2 A specified number of pulses is outputted once with the set output frequenc
101. The power of the ERZ2000 must be switched off and on again after the network settings are changed so that the new settings take effect PGS170 Synchronization is initiated using a GPS receiver module on COM 5 The following protocols are available Meinberg Std NMEA Computime ABB SPA Uni Erlangen SAT Racal A 83 LB Totalizer billing mode 1 Access Line Designation Value Unit Z8 1 Vol at base cond 17632183 m3 Represents all totalizers display separated with Z8 2 Volbasefraction 760281 m3 preceding and following comma Z8 3 Voltbeeof 0 Z8 4 Quantity of energy 4017893 In LK29 Overflow point 14 operating mode the 216 QOE fraction totali ding that the devi Example for energy totalizer E1 04 Energy 16 05 QOE fraction 0 833023 LBO6 Energy overflow 1 Quantity of carbon dioxide generated during the combustion of natural gas containing air DSfG status B DSfG status M Lom N zi A N N A 84 LJ Totalizer undefined billing mode Designation Value This totalizer counts when the billing mode is invalid e g incorrect switch position Unit mi E kwh kwh A mi un m3 mi kg ke i ke ke m gt n e E 20516 status okay D 22 DSfGstatusM A 85 LK Counter parameter In lines 3 6 9 and 12 the unit of the
102. VOLUME CORRECTOR AP 11 Formalism check Here enter a differential pressure value to check the flow rate equation only possible in Formalism check mode This function simulates the differential pressure and replaces the value measured AP 12 Zero point noise Differential pressure to be suppressed by the ERZ 2000 its effect corresponds to that of the creeping quantity limit AP 13 Min differential pressure 37 Lower limit of the permissible differential pressure of the orifice plate It is used to calculate Ommin shown in coordinate GB 02 Note dp min is a fixed value while Ommin is running value state quantities etc AP 14 Max differential pressure Upper limit of the permissible differential pressure of the orifice plate It is used to calculate Qmmax shown coordinate GB 01 Note dp max is a fixed value while Qmmax is a running value state quantities etc Measured values and parameters for cell 1 AP 15 cell 1 differential pressure AP 16 cell 1 input 17 act dp 1 offset 18 cell 1 source with menu for assignment to the relevant current input AP 19 dp 1 at 4 mA lower mapping limit AP 20 dp 1 at 20 mA upper mapping limit AP 21 dp 1 correction offset correction Measured values and parameters for cell 2 AP 22 cell 2 differential pressure AP 23 cell 2 input AP 24 act dp 2 offset AP 25 cell 2 source with menu for assignment to the relevant current input AP 26 dp 2 at 4 mA l
103. Wh m3 D 48 Retain value 11 9255 kWh m3 A 4 AE Standard density Access Line Designation Value Unit AS 1 Measured value 0 8351 kg m3 2 Input value gt EF01 Table value 141 0 8000 kg m3 i 5 Lower warning limit 0 7000 kg m3 Upper warning limit 1 0000 kg m3 0 7000 1 3000 X 0 01 For standard density sensors with 2 frequencies the second source is selected here Frequency 2 on wo WwW gt _ Hom mese D 23 Timeout 18000 S D 2 KENS Clear text display for DSfG status bits D 25 Mean for DSfg 0 8351 kg m3 AS 26 2nd input value Gs D 27 Current status Fixed value D 28 DSfG status Fixed value D 29 Used area 0 0000 kg m3 68 30 Format ih D 31 Min drag indicator 0 8351 kg m3 D 32 Max drag indicator 0 8351 kg m3 D 33 Current gradient 0 0000 kg m3 s D 34 Second mean 0 8351 kg m3 D 35 Minute mean 0 8351 kg m3 D 36 Hourly mean 0 8351 kg m3 D 37 Ongoing mean 0 8351 kg m3 D 38 Standard deviation 0 0000 kg m3 For online correction old FE 06 function Q 142 M a ji 5 AF Relative desity Access Line Designation Value Unit Important dv is measured or must be calculated depending on the sensor ANNEX 2 oo 5 c 6 00 o c 2 o 5 2 gt ovo xc
104. X 9 and optionally X 10 observe the polarity of the ERZ 2004 2104 are assigned X9 Terminal 1 Explosion protected option Enco Vo Terminal 2 Explosion protected option Enco Vo Terminal 3 Explosion protected option Vm measuring channel HFX Terminal 4 Explosion protected option Vm measuring channel HFX 5 Explosion protected option Vm reference channel HFY Terminal Explosion protected option Vm reference channel HFY Terminal 7 Explosion protected option pressure measurements transmitter optionally HART Terminal 8 Explosion protected option pressure measurements transmitter optionally HART Terminal 9 Expl prot option temperature transmitter optionally HART for PT100 see X10 Terminal 10 Expl prot option temperature transmitter optionally HART for PT100 see X10 X10 Terminali Spare unassigned explosion protected option for two line design 2 Spare unassigned explosion protected option for two line design Terminal 3 Spare unassigned explosion protected option for two line design Terminal 4 Spare unassigned explosion protected option for two line design 5 Spare unassigned explosion protected option for two line design 6 Spare unassigned explosion protected option for two line design Terminal 7 Explosion protected option PT 100 supply Terminal 8 Explosion protected option PT 100 sense Terminal 9 Explosion prot
105. You can also look up the coordinate in the documentation see Annex A of the manual or read it via the Ethernet interface using a PC and the download method You always configure the superblock using a PC and you operate it via the Ethernet interface using html downloads If you want the volumetric flow rate at measurement conditions to rank first in the superblock you have to proceed as follows Connect your PC via a crossover network cable Establish a connection call the MODBUS superblock html download enter your user code and then click the Edit function under the first item In the menu offered locate the previously selected coordinate and click on it Upload the changed setting and click Continue Then lock the user code again and you re done Now the newly entered measured value will be shown first in the MODBUS superblock See separate documentation for further details regarding remote control via PC Further parameters for the MODBUS interface The ERZ 2000 is a MODBUS slave Address adjustable from 1 to 247 Set the interface parameters for COM 1 2 and under Serial COMs in coordinates IB 01 and 02 The Modbus interface can be operated optionally in RTU or ASCII mode Depending on the model Modbus is available on COM 1 RS 232 422 or 485 depending on the hardware settings on COM 2 only RS 232 and additionally on COM 3 RS 232 or 485 There is another Modbus interface available as Modbus IP on the RJ45 connector
106. a IIC T V 06 ATEX 553139 X Tamb 20 C to 60 For technical data see the EC prototype test certificate Use The module can only be used in conjunction with the ERZ 2000 It is used for electrically separating measuring and control signals such as 20 mA current loops for example or adjusting or standardizing signals The different intrinsically safe circuits are used to operate intrinsically safe field devices in areas subject to explosion hazards The relevant laws and guidelines which are applicable to the intended use shall be observed Design version V1 is the standard design for a single line gas volume corrector while design version V2 has been designed for a two line gas volume corrector optional stage of extension Several transmitters or sensors can be connected to the EX1 NAMUR 2 card 2 volume transmitters with pulse sensors similar to DIN 19234 1 electronic totalizer ENCO 1 pressure sensor 4 to 20mA or HART 1 temperature sensor 4 to 20mA or HART Option 1 resistance thermometer PT100 4 wire connection Installation and putting into service in areas subject to explosion hazards The device is to be installed and put into service by specially trained technical staff only It is constructed according to the degree of protection IP20 in compliance with EN 60259 and in the case of adverse environmental conditions exceeding the degree of soiling 2 appropriate precautions are to be taken It is essential to avo
107. a telegram with DFO N i e do not send a reply The data section of this telegram then contains Vb Vn T and P of the slave Data is exchanged in this way One my data and one its data set of mutual importance is then stored in each device A serial number is sent together with the data for synchronization purposes If the data is valid the percentage deviations are then calculated The deviations of Vb and Vn are not actually determined using Vb and Vn but are derived from my Vb divided by my time and Vb divided by its time i e based on the flows Example for Vb or My flow rate m dVb m dt Its flow rate Ob lt 5 s Percentage deviation when calculating the master for example Vb dev Ob s Qb_m Ob m The formulas are implemented asymmetrically so that the master and slave have the same deviation value i e my and its are interchanged The deviations are checked with reference to an adjustable maximum value If the value is exceeded corresponding information messages are issued no alarm or warning The results and exchanged data are archived in archive group 7 and can be retrieved via DSfG Extensive details of the general topic can be found in the coordination system of the ERZ 2000 under O DSfG tandem meter comparison Seethe table of contents for other points relevant to DSfG 82 n e Alarms and warnings Special DSfG features Electrical connections DSfG bus DSfG conn
108. ain the display will turn darker and indicate input mode The old activation key will disappear and the ERZ 2000 will be waiting for the new key to be entered e Enter the new activation key and terminate your inputs with Enter e Now the device should no longer be under fault conditions but operate without any trouble An important function of the activation key is the verification of the program code which represents the official functions for custody transfer metering The activation key is used for verifying the check number cyclically The program can immediately detect a change in the official kernel whether it is caused by an unacceptable program version or a defect of the program memory which results in a modified check number This function is important in order to separate the program into an official part for custody transfer metering and into an application part 13 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 6 Description of checksums and the activation key Programs responsible for the calculation and accuracy of custody transfer processes are known as official kernels The programmer determines which program is official according to the following criteria formal if an official variable is described in the program module Program is official intuitive if executed functions can have an indirect effect on an official variable Program is official 14 Example unit correction The result of this definition is based on 5 cr
109. al Polynomial 2nd order Coefficients O and 1 define the polynomial Polynomial 3rd order Coefficients O 1 and 2 define the polynomial 4 20mA coefficient Coefficient O defines the min range coefficient 1 defines the max range 0 20mA coefficient Coefficient O defines the min range coefficient 1 defines the max range 4 20mA limit The min and max limits define the assignment of mA to pressure 0 20mA limit The min and max limits define the assignment of mA to pressure P DZU The pressure is measured by an ultrasonic measuring head USE 09 and transmitted via the DZU protocol The incoming measured quantity i e current input is assigned to the operating mode imposed with a correction value and shown with the correct unit If there is a fault the default value is used for further calculations and is shown as an absolute value 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR If the pressure sensor is to be operated using the HART protocol make sure that the operating mode is set to Measured value source value and a current input combined with the HART function is selected as source If the pressure sensor is operated as a transmitter make sure that its power supply is switched on in the associated menu of the current input The menu of the data sources comprises all metrological options of an input irrespective of whether or not these signals e g current or frequency signal analogous to the measured quantity exist for the selected tr
110. alarms Bit2 Temperature alarms Bit 3 Pressure alarms 4 Alarms associated with the standard volume Bit5 Alarms associated with the operating volume A 79 JB Message register B 51 Message event passiv j Passive fault bits transferred via modbus remain on 1 until acknowledged manually Active fault bits transferred via modbus remain on 1 while the fault is pending corresponds to the LEDs flashing on the front of the device Lines 1 to 50 contain the assigned message numbers See department documentation for the meaning Displays current pending active messages at 2 second intervals A 80 KA Times Clicking Edit opens a menu for setting the date and time Access Line Designation Value Date Prag j time Enter Cancel Take PC time Only available with open access code or calibration lock If access is closed the current time appears in line 1 The standard international short form of the name for the currently active time zone is displayed e g CET Central European Time CEST Central European Summer Time PST Pacific Standard Time PDT Pacific Daylight Savings Time KA13 Time zone The internal realtime clock RTC chip on the ERZ 2000 operates with UTC world time KA02 World time The most current local time KAO01 Date time is formed using the relevant offset for the preset time zone Clicking Edit opens a menu for selecti
111. all totalizers stop ED 14 Live value gt Temperature measurements continue to be taken for correction ED 15 Live value gt Pressure measurements continue to be taken for correction or ED 14 Retained value gt Temperature measurements are being retained for correction The measured value for revision can be seen in coordinate AC 24 base value ED 15 Retained value gt Pressure measurements are being retained for correction The measured value for revision can be seen in coordinate AB 24 base value 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR ED 01 Revision via contact ED 13 Running gt Activated by external contact to be used for tests with meters connected in series totalizers are running and are marked in the archive output pulses stop ED 14 Live value gt Temperature measurements continue to be taken for correction ED 15 Live value gt Pressure measurements continue to be taken for correction or ED 14 Retained value gt Temperature measurements are being retained for correction The measured value for revision can be seen in coordinate AC 24 base value 50 ED 15 Retained value gt Pressure measurements are being retained for correction The measured value for revision can be seen in coordinate AB 24 base value ED 01 Revision via contact ED 13 At rest gt Activated by external contact to be used for tests in the case of simulation all totalizers stop ED 14 Live value
112. alue is calculated after each complete second The current output is then set to the new value not immediately stage but instead is increased gradually towards the new continuous value slope in 100 increments of 10 milliseconds starting from the last value The output current is then smooth but delayed by one second A 94 MF Pulse output 1 terminal X3 1 X3 2 outputs Access Line Designation Value Unit Display of the current situation regarding pulse output fractions in the memory output frequency etc There are other options apart from assigning the output to a measured value direct output of the HF input or for test purposes the number of pulses entered in line 20 can be output as a one off pulse group or periodically every second Pulses are output either always or in synchronization with the main totalizer or disturbance totalizer Output mode for billing mode Pulse accumulation occurs when the current billing mode corresponds to one of the modes listed here Example 134 is set here Pulse accumulation occurs in billing modes 1 3 or 4 Accumulation does not occur in billing mode 2 Overflow If the pulse output memory exceeds the value specified under Overflow comes the message W70 0 Pulse 1 gt max is set If the pulse output memory falls below the value programmed under Overflow comes the message is canceled Strate
113. ansmitter 43 In or 4 20 mA limit mode the alarm limit parameters include also an assignment 0 mA or 4 mA to the lower adjusting value or an assignment 20 mA to the upper adjusting value If alarm limits and range limits are to be set separately from each other use the 0 or 4 20mA coefficient operating mode 3 2 7 1 Signal processing of the HART input pressure at measurement conditions Base functions of the HART input Reading the measured value Reading the measured value in burst mode Searching the address Evaluating faults Evaluating Config Flag Multimaster protocol Analog and digital communications are possible at the same time 3 2 8 Information about temperature parameters The temperature input can be parameterized for 14 different operating modes OFF No measurement input is switched off Default Fixed value no measurement PT100 500 1000 Polynomial according to Callendar van Dusen Measured value source value HART on 4 20 mA loop in combination with a current input Polynomial 1st order Coefficient O defines the polynomial Polynomial 2nd order Coefficients O and 1 define the polynomial Polynomial 3rd order Coefficients O 1 and 2 define the polynomial 4 20mA coefficient Coefficient O defines the min range coefficient 1 defines the max range 0 20mA coefficient Coefficient O defines the min range coefficient 1 defines the max range 4 20mA limit The min and max limits define th
114. application The code control meter in field 13 indicates the number of checks performed since the system was switched on A 35 EK Identification of hardware Access Line Designation Value Unit J 1 Version FC Bios 1 010 J 2 Checks 565B hex A checksum monitors the program of a microcontroller also installed on the J 3 FC bios time 07 10 2008 09 59 58 base board This checksum forms part of the custody transfer approval Control of the FPGA basic measuring functions etc 168 11 MAC Address 00 04 F3 00 2B A7 S12 Remarks 8 CAN r Infinec no A 36 EL Description site Access Line Designation Value Unit B 1 Measuring priority Main measurement B 2 Line name B 3 Measuring point defect B 4 Postal address each Pane B 5 Longitude 83260 o B 6 Latitude 4957700 2 7 Design meas pt Z hlpunktbez B 8 Owner Besitzer B 9 Property number Egentumsnun B 11 Start up 29 05 2006 1 12 Responsible person Verantwortiic B 13 Phone Rufnummer Inspector Eichbeamter 14 ERI B B 1 16 Line number o e N e e 17 Billing standby meas A 37 EM Erasing procedures Access Line Designation Value Unit 169 Q 15 accuracy test init Y 16 Gleargasmodem Corresponding memories and archives can be deleted here in superuser mode A 38 FC Freeze Acce
115. arm GC reports loss of methane 2 Yes 598 H 99 4 Adjusted float Floating point parameter adjusted to floating point 1 No notation 114 599 A 99 5 VOS corr error Error during VOS correction calculation 2 Yes 600 W 99 6 C fac comp Conversion factor is not plausible 2 Yes 601 A 99 7 AGA8 alarm AGA 8 algorithmic error 2 Yes 602 A 99 8 AGA892DC alarm AGA 8 92DC algorithmic error 2 Yes 603 W 99 9 Comp lt gt AGA 8 Components exceed AGA limits 2 Yes 604 H 59 0 Tesri ndam T maximum permitted deviation to tandem partner out of 1 Yes range 605 H 59 1 P lt gt P tandem P maximum permitted deviation to tandem partner out of 1 Yes range 606 H 59 2 VbesViTandem Vb maximum permitted deviation to tandem partner out 1 Vas of range 607 H 59 3 Vm maximum permitted deviation to tandem partner out 1 Ves of range 608 H 59 4 DP2 Corr denied Zero point correction for DP2 not accepted 1 No 609 H 59 5 DP3 Corr denied Zero point correction for DP3 not accepted 1 No Legend Alarm Warning Hint ZIS Internal computer error Message 1 2 1 One valued message only comes 2 Two valued message comes and goes In the case of a hint H a warning can be sent this depends on the setting in coordinate JA 7 in the case of a message M this is not possible 10 OPTIONAL EXPLOSION PROTECTED INPUT CARD 10 Optional explosion protected input card 10 1 Operating instructions for the installer Marking Type EX1 NAMUR 2 V 1 or V2 z 1 2 6 Ex i
116. ately before time adjustment 1 No 254 H 56 6 New time Time immediately after time adjustment 1 No 255 A R 56 7 Power OFF Supply voltage failure 2 No 256 A R 56 8 Channel 3 fault Pulse counting channel 3 implausible 1 No 257 56 9 Channel 4 fault Pulse counting channel 4 implausible 1 No 258 H 57 0 HF param error Inconsistent parameterization HF 1 No 259 W 58 0 Path 1 loss Path 1 loss 1 No 260 W 58 1 Path 2 loss Path 2 loss 1 No 261 W 58 2 Path 3 loss Path 3 loss 1 No 262 W 58 3 Path 4 loss Path 4 loss 1 No 263 W 58 4 Path 5 loss Path 5 loss 1 No 264 W 58 5 Path 6 loss Path 6 loss 1 No 265 W 58 6 Path 7 loss Path 7 loss 1 No 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 58 7 60 0 60 1 60 2 60 3 60 4 60 5 60 6 60 7 60 8 60 9 61 0 61 1 61 2 61 3 61 4 61 5 61 6 61 7 61 8 61 9 62 0 62 1 62 2 62 3 62 4 62 5 62 6 62 7 62 8 62 9 63 0 63 1 63 2 63 3 63 4 63 5 63 6 63 7 63 8 63 9 64 0 64 1 64 2 64 3 64 4 64 5 Path 8 loss Ethane lt l warn lim Ethane gt up warn lim C3H8 I warn lim C3H8 gt up war lim N CA I warn lim N C4 gt up warn lim I CA I warn lim I C4 up warn lim N C5 I warn lim N C5 gt up warn lim I C5 lt I warn lim I C5 up warn lim NeoC5 lt l warn lim NeoC5 g
117. b1 1 000000 1 000000 5 NT ms Nothing is happening Q 4 Vmi 1 000000 TS All tot 0 221 Q si 1 000000 kWh All totalizers main disturbance NN including fractions are set to O Q 6 Mi s kg Totalizers for an undefined billing a 7 1 000000 M mode are also set to 0 a 8 1 000000 ms All dist tot 0 All disturbance totalizers including pr Q 9 Vm2 1 000000 m3 fractions are set to 0 Totalizers for an undefined billing mode are also set to Q 10 kWh 0 The main totalizers remain 11 2 1 000000 unchanged Q 12 Vb3 1 000000 m3 All Vb totalizers uncorrected Q 13 1 000000 m3 operating volume are set to the current value of the assigned Vo Q 14 Vm3 1 000000 mS totalizer original totalizer All other totalizers remain unchanged 15 3 1 000000 kWh a Q 16 M3 1 000000 kg All Vbk totalizers corrected operating Q 17 Vb4 1 000000 m3 volume are set to the current value of the assigned Vb totalizer uncorrected Q 18 Vo4 1 000000 S operating volume All other totalizers remain unchanged Q 19 Vm4 1 000000 MS i Q 20 E4 1 000000 kWh Individual All totalizers that were not a 21 M4 1 000000 kg programmed in the totalizer set list with a negative value are set to this Q 22 1 000000 value The decimal portion is written to the fraction totalizer Then 1 is 1 000000 23 DVci m3 entered in the relevant inpu
118. bar Signals can be assigned to free inputs in a similar way to the calibration relevant measurement inputs 237 a m WERE A m Signals can be assigned to free a o _ calibration relevant measurement Mim ret d H a 4 4 4 A 108 OO Extra counter 1 X7 1 2 Access Line Designation Value Unit Signals can be assigned to free inputs Input pulses a similar way the calibration e 10 Weighing relevant measurement inputs E msma ST 239 A 109 OU Free programmable archive Access Line Designation Value Unit A record cycle not equal to off must be selected 3 edit so that the freely programmable archive is recognized as archive ERE EI LB10 group 9 when the 240 um master data is imported A 110 PB Maximum load display maximum hourly value of the day Access Line Designation Value Unit A 111 PG Maximum load display maximum minute value of the hour Access Line Designation The smallest time unit for the maximum load is displayed to the nearest minute for easy verification The maximum value for the hours days and months is formulated on this basis It is possible to verify the maximum load using the original data without running separate memories in fast motion A test cycle of one hour is reduced to one minute etc B Seal diagrams ANNEX Flow comput
119. ble under Modbus Designation Overview Pictures 7945583 7945583 118729 118790 193 86 0 80 5606 Hz 0 00000 Hz 1 00000 3322 16 okay At rest Measured values Inputs Components D2 OFF Leer 999999999 800 Coordinates for analysis diagnosis troubleshooting etc UJ f de que qm qe iem pem ques qi pes que e ze pq es 52 53 54 55 56 57 62 63 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 US 74 75 76 77 78 Time of last event 09 08 2010 09 23 22 Orig doc printer 0 Data memory Battery change Diverse 11 Diverse 12 Magic number Save network conf 0 0 Time of power fail Power outage time unsigned short 0 unsigned short 0 unsigned short 0 Billing No Bill modes EOS algorithm Eval subst val Eval subst val Behaviour totaliz Behaviour totaliz Parameter check 01 01 1970 0 Frozen values 47110815 0 06 08 2010 15 41 07 236521 0 0 0 fc A 106 OF Extra analog value 1 Access Line 25 CI ies pies ie 1 1 175 Designation Measured value Input value Operating mode Unit Default Lower warning limit Upper warning limit Coefficient 0 Coefficient 1 Coefficient 2 Coefficient 3 Value OFF 26 10 0000 0 000 100 000 2 1E 04 kByte Identification for ultrasound meter diagnostic software Unit 8 057 e mw bar bar
120. bsolute pressure below lower warning limit Absolute pressure exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization absolute pressure Loss of standard density Standard density below lower alarm limit Standard density exceeds upper alarm limit Standard density gradient exceeds maximum Standard density below lower warning limit Standard density exceeds upper warning limit Vo failure effect of fault warning Hardware pulse comparison has taken effect Quantitative comparison for synchronous run has taken effect Input Valence ied Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NNN NN HN NY YK NM Yes Yes 101 102 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 04 9 05 0 05 1 05 2 05 3 05 4 05 5 05 6 05 7 05 8 05 9 06 0 06 1 06 2 06 3 06 4 06 5 06 9 07 0 07 1 07 2 07 3 07 4 07 5 07 9 08 0 08 1 08 2 08 3
121. c fail Nettime error HARTO failure HART 10 failure HART 1 1 failure HART 12 failure rd loss rd l alarm lim rd gt up alarm lim rd jump rd l warn lim rd gt up warn lim rd param error Hs GC timeout sd GC timeout rd GC timeout CO2 GC timeout N2 GC timeout H2 GC timeout Hs GC alarm sd GC alarm rd GC alarm CO2 GC alarm N2 GC alarm H2 GC alarm Beattie alarm CH4 loss CH4 l alarm lim CH4 gt up alarm lim CH4 jump CH4 I warn lim CH4 gt up warn lim USZ totalizer for Vo2 shows implausible behaviour USZ totalizer for Vo1D shows implausible behaviour USZ totalizer for Vo2D shows implausible behaviour Parameterization of time synchronization implausible Current measurement 9 failed Current measurement 10 failed Current measurement 11 failed Current measurement 12 failed Resistance measurement 3 failed Resistance measurement 4 failed Mathematical error corrupt code detected hard wired contact of volume transmitter shows alarm hard wired contact of volume transmitter shows warning Time synchronization failed Nettime error HART 9 input failed HART 10 input failed HART 11 input failed HART 12 input failed Loss of relative density Relative density below lower alarm limit Relative density exceeds upper alarm limit Relative density gradient exceeds maximum Relative density below lower warning limit Relative density exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization relative density No m
122. calculated with the coefficient of linear thermal expansion GAO5 Lin stretch throat or GAO6 Lin stretch pipe Tcrr fact 1 lin stretch temp 20 41 Selection of materials The correction factor GAO3 T crr fact throat or 04 T crr fact pipe is calculated with an approximation equation and the coefficients A and B Tcrr fact 1 A temp 20 temp 20 10 The permissible temperature range for the materials listed extends from 200 C to 600 C with the exception of copper nickel and yellow brass which have 500 C as their upper limit 3 2 6 3 Special case of a revision to be performed on an orifice plate flowcomputer If you press the Mode key chapter Access coordinate ED 01 to change the revision mode from Operation to Revision you can follow the check of the individual differential pressure cells by pressing the Orifice key or selecting the GZ overview of the orifice when using the browser without the changeover to the next cell being displayed The display of the ERZ changes to 2 Revision dp mbar dp2 xx yy mbar dp3 xx yy mbar If you scroll forward the relevant current inputs of the cells will be shown I dp1xyyy mA I dp2 X yyy mA I dp3 X yyy mA Thus the whole range from 0 to the maximum value can be followed during the check of a differential pressure cell 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR There are two revision modes Revision Standard func
123. ce Interference suppression Noise immunity 24 V DC 1096 15 0 7 A depending on the components used 24W According to G485 EN5008 1 1 EN50082 2 97 8 CHARACTERISTIC DATA 8 1 8 Digital Vo totalizer The data transfer between the gas meter and the volume corrector is made through a screened and twisted core pair The electrical characteristic data comply with DIN 19234 NAMUR Data transmission is made in one direction and in a non reactive way from the gas meter to the volume corrector Layer 1 bit transfer layer The cable used must fulfil the requirements for intrinsically safe circuits A screened and twisted 2 core cable 98 has to be used and the screening is to be earthed on the side of the volume corrector In order to ensure the ZAS intrinsic safety type of protection not only on the side of the primary device but also on the side of the end device it is essential that the following limits are not exceeded Voltage Uo 13 5 V Current intensity Is c 15 mA Power P 210 mW The electrical levels on the connecting line comply with DIN 19234 NAMUR Power is supplied with UO 8 V and 15 8 mA Data transmission is made asynchronously at a rate of 2400 bps The level for log 1 MARK must be greater than 2 1 mA while the level for log O SPACE must be less than 1 2 mA Layer 2 data link layer Data transmission is made character by character Each character includes 1 start bit 7 data bits even pari
124. concise version of the manual for more details 74 IJ Imported main gas quality via modbus Access Line Designation Value Unit The gas quality data is written to the M 1 Trigger Werne 0 device via MODBUS MODBUS IP Wo 2 Bing o M 3 Calorific value 10 9949 kWh m3 IJ for the main PGC M 4 Relative density 0 5739 IK for the comparator PGC 206 5 Standard density 0 7420 kg m3 M 6 1 9100 mol 7 H2 0 00000 mol NEN M 8 N2 0 9300 mol M 9 Methane 86 2500 mol M 10 Ethane 8 5600 mol M 11 Propane 1 8900 mol M 12 N butane 0 3900 mol M 13 l butane 0 00000 mol M 14 N pentane 0 0500 mol M 15 Wpentane 0 00000 mol M 16 Neo Pentane 0 00000 mol M 17 Hexane 0 0200 mol M 18 Heptane 0 00000 mol M 19 Octane 0 00000 mol M 20 Nonane 0 00000 mol M 21 Decane 0 00000 mol M 22 H2S 0 00000 mol M 23 H20 0 00000 mol M 24 Helium 0 00000 mol M 25 02 0 00000 mol 26 CO 0 00000 mol 27 Ethene 0 00000 mol M 28 Propene 0 00000 mol M 29 Argon 0 00000 mol M 30 Id GQ source 0 M 31 0 M 32 GQ type 0 M 33 Ord No Analysis 0 M 34 Time stamp 09 08 2010 09 22 58 M 35 12 protection 0 M 36 Roadway 0 AS 43 AcudvaeCROI2 207 ES 44 90 ES 45 Pestforon s 1000 ES 46 __ ES 47 Presetforgodd2 20 Ps __ ES 48 90 ES 49 Presetforcaas 30 000 ES 50 ES 51 Petron 40 27574400 B 54
125. d follow up time corresponds to the time between time stamps 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 Delay parameter for a waiting time before the start with time stamp 1 There are several ways of using the functional test function Use of the time stamps through manual input Once the 4 time stamps are entered the function is activated automatically when the respective times are reached and stops at the end of the 4th time stamp The testing 171 time the prestart follow up time and the delay have no influence Use of the time stamps by making entries via the DSfG using the revision PC Once the 4 time stamps are entered the function is activated automatically when the respective times are reached and stops at the end of the 4th time stamp The testing time the prestart follow up time and the delay have no influence Parameterization of the time stamps by making remote entries using the browser Click on the Plan button using the mouse The 4 time stamps are then calculated from the time on the PC not the corrector and the values for the testing prestart follow up and delay times The function is activated automatically when the respective times are reached and stops at the end of the 4th time stamp The previous function for the DSfG revision is merged with the custody transfer functional test Although the user has the option of viewing the archives the context cannot be included on the 4 lines of the display and the user is prompted to note down the values
126. d via software Spare unassigned Spare unassigned In the case of the ERZ 2004 2104 the frequency measuring card is not required terminals X9 and X10 remain unassigned 119 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Internal isolating device of type Ex1 NAMUR 1 2V 1 or V2 T V 06 ATEX 553139 X The following examples refer to the design with an internal isolating device If the internal isolating device is used terminal X 8 of the ERZ 2002 2102 is used for frequency measurements 120 X8 Terminali 1 Signal input 6 to be assigned via software Terminal 2 Signal input 6 to be assigned via software Terminal 3 Signal input 7 frequency input 5 density to be assigned via software Terminal 4 Signal input 7 frequency input 5 density to be assigned via software Terminal 5 Signal input 8 frequency input 6 standard density to be assigned via software 6 Signal input 8 frequency input 6 standard density to be assigned software mm Terminal 7 Signal input 9 frequency input 7 standard density to be assigned via software 8 Signal input 9 frequency input 7 standard density to be assigned via software Terminal 9 Signal input 10 frequency input 8 velocity of sound to be assigned via software Terminal 10 Signal input 10 frequency input 8 velocity of sound to be assigned via software If the internal isolating device is used terminals
127. e 1 resistance measurement number is to be set at 1 while in the case of an 100 at X 10 line 31 Ex resistance number is to be set at 1 In the case of frequency inputs you should note the following frequencies F1 F2 F3 and F4 are dedicated for volume measurements The standard assignments are as follows F1 for the measuring channel and F2 for the reference channel Frequencies F5 F6 F7 and F8 are reserved for the density standard density and velocity of sound This frequency measurement feature has another time base and is able to measure frequencies more accurately and with a higher resolution When activating frequency inputs make sure that frequencies 1 to 4 volume are always included in counting Example Gas volume corrector with HF 2 and 3 density and standard density Seven frequency inputs are to be activated 1 to 4 for the volume 5 for the density 6 and 7 for the standard density 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 2 4 Information about parameters for the volume at measurement conditions The following operating modes are possible Designation displayed 1 ENCO2 Vo 2 ENCO with LF transmitter Vo LF 1 chan 3 LFtransmitter with ENCO LF 1 chan Vo 4 ENCO with HF transmitter Vo HF 1 chan ____ 5 HFtransmitter with ENCO HF 1 chan Vo 28 6 ENCO with 2 channel HF transmitter 1 1 Vo HF2 chan 1 1 7 2 channel HF transmitter 1 1 with ENCO HF2 chan 1 1 Vo 8 ENCO with 2 chan HF transm
128. e Unit Ep 20 vma Setting of pulse values for measuring separately for meters that count A 50 GD Determination of characteristic Access Line Designation i Display of kv factors for forwards and backwards operation Display of the number for the nearest support point below above the current 182 percentage flow If the value 1 is displayed the percentage flow is currently below above the lowest support point Option for defining whether or not the correction procedure should be used for the calculation Options include support point procedure polynomial via flow and polynomial via Reynolds number Defines whether calculation should continue with or without the correction when the maximum deviation is exceeded Definition of the roadway fixed assignment or independent of the billing mode A 51 GE Error curve linearization forward flow Access Line Designation Value Unit There are 16 pairs of support points for forward operation and polynomial coefficients at the end of the table The same function is also available for reverse operation under GF 183 184 Access Line Designation Value Unit A 53 Start up and slow down monitoring Access Line Designation 10000 10000 OFF Action as alarm i e c oO 4 3 s c o 5 2 ye D e A 54 GI Ultrasonic transmitter Designation Value No Sam
129. e assignment of mA to temperature 0 20mA limit The min and max limits define the assignment of mA to temperature T DZU The temperature is measured by an ultrasonic measuring head USE 09 and transmitted via the DZU protocol Use the cursor key to browse to the Operating mode function Set the desired operating mode there after you have opened the calibration lock 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR The incoming measured quantity i e current input is assigned to the operating mode imposed with a correction value and shown with the correct unit There is a correction value for the Pt100 sensor and another one for the current transmitters The definition of PT 100 or PT 500 or PT 1000 is to be made in the Operating mode function in the Gas temperature chapter If there is a fault the default value is used for further calculations If the temperature sensor is to be operated using the HART protocol make sure that the operating mode is set 44 to Measured value source value and a current input combined with the HART function is selected as source If the temperature sensor is operated as a transmitter make sure that its power supply is switched on in the associated menu of the current input The menu of the data sources comprises all metrological options of an input irrespective of whether or not these signals e g current or frequency signal analogous to the measured quantity exist for the selected transmitter In or 4
130. e exceeds GERG limits Hydrogen exceeds GERG limits Maximum permissible GERG iterations exceeded Temperature exceeds AGA limits Pressure exceeds AGA limits Relative density exceeds AGA limits Carbon dioxide exceeds AGA limits Nitrogen exceeds AGA limits Superior calorific value exceeds AGA limits Hydrogen exceeds AGA limits Other AGA errors AGA interim result pi tau exceed limits N N MBS NY MY NY NM hn N N N N NN NN NY NY NY NY YM N MN MF YN No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 105 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 220 A 51 9 Interp pt probl Error during calculation of interpolation point 2 Yes 221 A 52 0 Q lt Qmin Flow rate at measurement conditions below minimum 2 Yes 222 A 52 1 Q gt Qmax Flow rate at measurement conditions exceeds maximum 2 Yes 223 M 52 2 Call Carrier signal modem 1 No 224 M 52 3 PTB time PTB s telephone time service time has been detected 1 No 225 W 52 4 BusID lt gt 12 data transmission has not 1 No E 226 W 52 5 RDT IDe 16 c identification has not exactly 1 227 52 6 illegal Illegal operating mode 2 No 228 M 54 0 Calibr lock Calibration lock is open 1 No EE 229 M 54 1 User lock User lock is open 1 No 230 M 54 2 Revision Revision switch is open 1 No mum 231
131. e made in the logbook For the call up software archive group 10 can be shown or hidden under ID DSfG entity recording in line 4 by toggling between Yes and No AG 10 visible Yes 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 4 2 Triggering a freeze procedure A switch is connected to an unassigned pulse input Then the freeze function is assigned to this input To activate a freeze procedure the switch must be closed From version 1 6 onwards there is another alternative to activate a freeze procedure directly during accessing the freeze function via the browser by clicking the mouse button 5 3 4 3 Changing the direction billing mode zd A maximum of four directions billing modes per switch contact can be selected The switches contacts are assigned to the terminals by means of the software The following options are available for selection 1 contact switches 2 directions 2 contacts switch 2 directions 2 contacts switch 4 directions 4 contacts switch 4 directions plus other options for switching the mode via the measured value or forward reverse information from a transmitter e g ultrasonic flowmeter or for selecting a fixed assignment If an illogical case occurs the device switches automatically to the totalizers for the undefined direction All settings have to be made under EC Billing mode S 21 BM at revision unchanged B 22 suppression X In EC 21 BM at revision you can preset if the ERZ 2000 auto
132. e measured values and writes them into its archive The maximum value display function is based on observing quantity units per hour and comparing them to a quantity from a previous time segment of the same observation period e g a day If the new value is higher than the comparative value the new value is entered into the archive All the other data are derived from the maximum hourly values per day and are also written into the archive The maximum value display has been integrated into the volume corrector and can be accessed any time by 65 pressing the 5 Archive function key To quit the maximum value display press any other function key If there is a type plate of the integrated data logger fixed to the front panel of the volume corrector the data logger has been officially verified If there is no type plate this function is available but has not been officially verified The maximum values can be viewed by manually operating the ERZ 2000 in accordance with the following example Press 5 Archive and the Cursor Left key once to access the following view Maximum values The arrow is located on the second line and can be moved Max hourly value per day upwards or downwards using the cursor keys In this example Max hourly value per month pressing Enter will select the archive with the maximum Max hourly value per year hourly values of a day A new window will open with the Maximum hourly value per day heading and the first
133. e pressure sensor used have to be communicated to the corrector as transmitter data Apart from the parameters for measurement the type manufacturer serial number etc have to be entered in the Absolute pressure chapter as well Then these data appear automatically in the ID display Example for data entry Press 1 Meas P T The arrow 73 is already located on Pabs Press Enter and then the Cursor Down key to 17 access the relevant values and enter the data There are the following operating modes for transmitting measured values OFF No measurement input is switched off Default No measurement fixed value m from gauge pressure The value is derived from the gauge pressure sensor connected Measured value source value HART on 4 20 mA loop in combination with a current input mmm Polynomial 1st order Coefficient O defines the polynomial Polynomial 2nd order Coefficients O and 1 define the polynomial Polynomial 3rd order Coefficients O 1 and 2 define the polynomial 4 20mA coefficient Coefficient O defines the min range coefficient 1 defines the max range 0 20mA coefficient Coefficient O defines the min range coefficient 1 defines the max range 4 20mA limit The min and max limits define the assignment of mA to pressure 0 20mA limit The min and max limits define the assignment of mA to pressure P DZU The pressure is measured by an ultrasonic measuring head USE 09 and transmitted via the DZU
134. e primary measured 38 Resistance 2 gt NJO1 0 00 O values for the resistance inputs Ne DE DEN po applicable Frequency input 1 gt 01 80 2911 Hz Frequency input 2 gt NMO1 0 0000 Hz Frequency input 3 gt NNO1 0 0000 Hz Display of the primary measured values Frequency input 4 gt NOO 1 0 0000 Hz for the frequency inputs 20 Frequency input 5 gt NPO1 0 0000 Hz 21 Frequency input 6 gt 001 0 0000 Hz 22 Frequency input 7 gt NRO1 0 0000 Hz 23 Frequency input 8 gt NSO1 0 0000 Hz 24 Current input 1 gt 0 0002 mA 25 Current input 2 gt NBO1 0 0001 mA 26 Current input 3 gt NCO1 0 0000 mA 27 Current input 4 gt 001 0 0000 mA 28 Current input 5 gt NEO1 0 0001 mA 29 Current input 6 gt NFO1 0 0001 mA ee EPOD 30 Current input 7 gt NGO1 0 0000 mA 31 Current input 8 gt NHO1 0 0000 mA 32 Current input 9 gt NUO1 0 0000 mA 33 Current input 10 gt NVO 1 0 0000 mA 34 Current input 11 gt NWO1 0 0000 mA Display of the internal device 35 Current input 12 gt NXO1 0 0000 mA temperature 39 Resistance 3 gt NYO1 0 00 O 40 Resistance 4 gt 701 0 00 Q Binary pattern of the contact inputs 41 Contact input c M Hex 174 FG43 Testing aid The testing aid is provided for tests in the factory Prerequisite is EB17 device status brand new select
135. e totalizer set for a second base condition This affects the main and 161 disturbance totalizers for BM 1 2 3 4 The calculation is connected with an operation using AGA892DC The corresponding totalizers can be seen in the columns in the lines 25 26 and 27 In the totalizer overview the totalizers for the second base condition are indicated as Vx1 2 3 4 or SVx1 2 3 4 The second base condition is set in column DI Extra base condition A 28 EC Billing mode Different billing modes are available The first two correspond to classic roadways 1 and 2 and can be controlled via the usual contact inputs Several options are available A contact like on the ERZ 9000 or 2 contacts like on the ERZ 2200 Measuring limits can also be used as switches Access Line Designation Value Unit Edit opens another menu for selecting the measured value for the switching threshold If a measuring limit is used as a switch the threshold must be configured here The 3 threshold values can be cascaded B 9 Clear text BM1 from Werne B 10 Clear text BM2 from Vitzeroda B 11 Clear text AM3 Names can be assigned to the billing AM B 12 Clear text BM4 mod s Indication of the active switch positions contact input _ 18 SourceBMcontact2 gt DEP z Selection of the contact input used to ee control the billing mode OFF B 22 BMO suppression ee
136. ec 4 with 4 pulses per sec 3 2 12 Information about inputs and outputs 3 2 12 1 Current outputs Press 4 O to reach the Current input 1 to 4 chapters There all important values for parameterization and display are combined By using the relevant features all appropriate data calculated values etc can be selected and thus mapped on the current output Outputs The arrow is located on the third line and can be moved Overview upwards or downwards using the cursor keys In this Current output 1 example pressing Enter will select the Current output 1 Current output 2 chapter A new window will open with the Current output 1 heading The contents of this chapter can be browsed using the cursor keys There are two parameters for assigning a measured value to an output quantity 151 assignment optimizes the pressure temperature and all flow rate values for control purposes 2nd assignment extended selection of all the other values which can be mapped as a current output If a parameter is selected under Assignment it will be shown under Physical value together with its correct unit Its output value is seized by a correction factor calculated from the lower and upper calibration values which is mapped on its limit ranges upper and lower mapping and the operating mode set If the physical value exceeds the defined value a warning is generated There is an option to output a constant current test 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CO
137. ected option PT 100 sense Terminal 10 Explosion protected option PT 100 supply 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Note when using the internal isolating device It is possible to mix inputs with regard to explosion protection i e a single signal can also be used with an external isolating device or with the explosion proof enclosure type of protection mixed with the intrinsically safe type of protection Example The volume inputs for the measuring and reference channels and the original ENCO totalizer are assigned to X 9 and operated via the internal isolating card while the pressure sensor as a 4 to 20 mA transmitter and the temperature sensor as a PT 100 4 wire connection are operated with the explosion proof enclosure type of protection and connected to X 5 Other possible mixtures are conceivable Data interfaces X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X 18 X 19 COM 1 interface first Modbus RTU or ASCII COM 2 interface for ultrasonic flowmeter DZU COM 3 interface DSfG master or second Modbus COM 4 interface DSfG bus COM 5 interface for external modem Ethernet network connection for remote operation or Modbus IP CAN bus for external expansions 121 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 11 2 3 Pin assignments for COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 and COM 5 COM 1 Pin RS 232 mode RS422 mode RS 485 mode 1 U 5V DC U 5V DC 0 5V DC 2 RxD TxD A 3 TxD a R TA A data 122 4 p RxD A v a 5 GND GND SGND
138. ector pin assignments e Electrical connections DSfG bus DSfG connector pin assignments 5 2 3 Z data elements Any ERZ coordinates that are not linked in the manufacturer dependent data element lists from the DSfG specification can be addressed using Z data elements so that they can be read and written If the calibration lock is open custody transfer coordinates can be modified as well The data element address is comprised of 1 Address position 7 2 and 3 address position Column name 4 and 5 Address position Line number Address position 1 is defined with z which means manufacturer specific data element Address positions 2 and 3 are generated directly from the column name for the coordinates In address positions 4 and 5 the ine number for the coordinates is displayed as follows Line number Addr positions 2 and 3 1 aa 2 ab 3 ac 26 az 27 ba 28 bb 29 bc Example of coordinates HN 08 Comparison VOS z hn ah p Column HN fixed 5 2 4 Archive groups Archive assignment documentation OA Archive group 1 Traditional like in MRG2200 main meter for AM 1 plus measured values OB Archive group 2 Traditional like in MRG2200 disturbance counter for AM 1 OC Archive group 3 Traditional like in MRG2200 main meter for AM 2 plus measured values OD Archive group 4 Traditional like in MRG2200 disturbance counter for AM 2 Ql Archive group 9 Freely programmable archive 83 Archive group 10 Assigned with spec
139. ectrically isolated from the computer but not from each other The following signal generators can be used Contact Open collector drain Active push pull U max 5V max 13 mA f max 10 Hz Overvoltage protection 6 8 V 8 1 5 HART protocol connection of the SMART transmitter optional 2 conductor system Simultaneous analog and digital communications Multimaster protocol 3 inputs on the HART card of these two are reserved for pressure and temperature can be extended to 6 inputs If the isolating card is used another 2 HART inputs are available 8 1 6 Analog outputs Current outputs Number 4 Range 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA Resolution 12 bits Burden 7000 Overvoltage protection from 33 V electrically isolated 8 1 7 Other outputs Signal outputs Number 8 U max 24V DC P max 150 mW Ic 100 mA UCEsat 1 2V or Rhon 500 F max 400 Hz Overvoltage protection 33 V electrically isolated Pulse outputs Number 4 tmin OFF 16 ms tmax OFF 230 ms tmin ON 16 ms tmax ON 230 ms 8 CHARACTERISTIC DATA Ic UCEsat F max 400 mA 1 2V or Rhon 50 400 Hz Overvoltage protection 33 V electrically isolated Status outputs alarm and warning U max max P max RDSon Photomos relay Ic UCEsat F max 24 V DC 100 mA 100 mW 500 100 mA 1 2V or Rhon 50 400 Hz Overvoltage protection 33 V electrically isolated Power supply Input voltage Typical current input Max power DSfG interfa
140. efinable text The messages will be entered in the DSfG logbook Counting inputs extra counters The extra counters have places before and after the decimal point just like the main totalizers for custody transfer metering It is possible to assign a value and a unit to an extra counter Assignment to the archive In archive 10 four check totalizers eight extra analog values and six extra counters can be stored The four extra counters are assigned to the frequency inputs 1 to 4 as additional totalizers Independently from correction a check totalizer can be activated here This totalizer is permanently connected to the input concerned and does not differentiate between main or disturbance quantities Neither error curve linearization nor suppression of creeping quantites are performed A unit and a value can be added independently of correction The fraction part places after the decimal point is stored by a fraction totalizer The check totalizer will be activated if the Valuation parameter is set to a number greater than O The eight extra analog values are assigned to the analog inputs It is possible to assign either six extra counters or eight binary inputs to the eight contact inputs The extra counters have been designed for slow counting jobs and their maximum counting frequency is limited to 5 Hz It is possible to assign user definable texts and a meaning to the eight binary inputs hint warning or alarm The relevant entries will b
141. efree if qm passes the range from the creeping quantity limit to the lower alarm limit during c start up and slow down An alarm is generated if qm is still below the alarm limit and above the creeping quantity limit after the start up or slow down time has been exceeded The alarm is defined as going when the lower alarm limit is passed when the plant is started up or when the creeping quantity limit is passed when the plant is shut down Start up slow down time There is a separate Start up Slow down chapter to be found under the 9 Meter key Here you can see the momentary state the current start up and slow down times and the parameters for the start up and slow down times Start up and slow down times are parameters for the time monitoring of the lower flow rate limit qmmin The qmmin alarm is not triggered until one of these times has elapsed These parameters are important for the start up and slow down phases See also Starting up and shutting down a plant Creeping quantity limit The Vm and Vb totalizer readings are not increased as long as the flow rate at measurement conditions is below the creeping quantity limit The creeping quantity cut off function prevents uncontrolled counting of pulses e g in the case of swinging movements when a turbine meter is at standstill or of pulses at zero drift in the case of other gas meters Creeping quantity mode There are the two following options Do not use the creeping
142. egende A 7 Sicherungsmarke Deckel B Sicherungsmarke Boden Deckel als Boden um 180 ge dreht montiert Legend A 7 seal cover B 7 seal bottom cover is used as bottom 180 turned Ansicht vereinfacht von rechts simplyfied view from the right Deckel Boden Plombenplan drw no 063193 4 RMG Messtechnik GmbH PTO Zustands Mengenumwerter ERZ2004 mit H chstbelastungs Anzeigeger t ET2000 drawn Ramshaw RMG Brennwert Mengenumwerter ERZ2104 mit H chstbelastungs Anzeigeger t ET2000 checked Butzbach Germany www rmg com Cover Bottom seal placement pns gt Volume corrector ERZ2004 with integrated data logger ET2000 Energy corrector ERZ2104 with integrated data logger ET2000 ANNEX F r diese Zeichnung behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor DIN 34 mega 8111330 eee OO 14 wn MID 3051 Seal over electronics cover and case Seal over terminal cover and case place the seal after connecting Seal over ID plate and case Approval indication on ID plate Seal over upper label and case label covers the setting axes Place the seal so that the approval indication is not covered e Dimensions for Seals MoBe ohne 150 Methode A 150 Me
143. egr 33 GCtg C1 0 000 mole 4 GC 6000 Fields IH 30 to IH 43 show the gas quality data originating directly from the PGC They relate to the stream selection and if appropriate are taken over into fields IH 03 to IH 16 Furthermore 71 original data can be forwarded to other correctors via a COM interface using the RMG bus master mode 4 GC 6000 IL GC6000 Access Line Designation Value Unit Variable Communication with the analyzer must start within 5 minutes 72 Counter for flushing procedures From this value the analyzer calculates the number of calibration runs and the number of flushing procedures to be carried out beforehand Max number of analyses for delaying calibration after a restart Counter for analyses until calibration after a restart Status of calibration after a restart Yes will activate the recording of gas quality data in the long term archive The archive is located on the internal 35 total raw 0 000 mole gcTotRaw memory card The status of the 36 Oven temperature 0 00 ne gcOvenT memory card can be checked via FJ 37 Carrier gas press 0 00 kPa gcGasP File system 38 interface state Restart ymesstyp 39 GC6000 error map 00000000 hex ystatus GC6000 valve state 0000 hex yventile Status of the values in the DSfG archive AGB GC6000 GQ Deosm top aii 4 GC 6000 IM GC600
144. ending on the device type and setting of operating modes complete chapters columns or individual coordinates are hidden in the coordinate system Only such values are displayed which are relevant to the device type selected In addition there are also functions or coordinates which are meant for service or verification purposes only Depending on the visibility level and the device type chosen it is not possible to see all parameters and data all the time The structure of the coordinate system has been designed in such a way that comparable displays and functions of all chapters columns always appear in the same line If you are within a column e g at the Min range parameter you can use the keys to jump to the neighbouring columns on the same line level where you will also reach the Min range parameter For a description of the complete coordinate system please see the annex to this documentation Annex A 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 1 2 Examples for accessing and showing parameters Example Measured values Key Cancel Meas P T If you press 1 Meas P T the display will jump to showing all available measured values The number of measured values is calculated dynamically in accordance with the mode settings and the state of the device There is an arrow gt displayed in front of the short designation of the first measured value which can be moved upwards or downwards using the cursor
145. enu OFF Sensor switched off Analog 1 range 7 Measuring range measured analogly with 1 cell 4 to 20 mA Analog 2 ranges Measuring range measured analogly with 2 cells 4 to 20 mA Analog 3 ranges 7 Measuring range measured analogly with 3 cells 4 to 20 mA Digital 1 range Measuring range measured digitally HART with 1 cell Digital 2 ranges Measuring range measured digitally HART with 2 cells Digital 3 ranges Measuring range measured digitally HART with 3 cells Analog digital 1 range Measuring range measured analogly and digitally with 1 cell Analog digital 2 ranges Measuring range measured analogly and digitally with 2 cells Analog digital 3 ranges Measuring range measured analogly and digitally with 3 cells Formalism check n this operating mode a differential pressure default value can be used instead of the measured value in order to check the flow rate equations n this operating mode the faster analog measured value is used for calculation and in parallel with this the slower digital measured value is used to check and adjust the analog value In this way flow rate calculation is performed with the speed of the analog signal 7 cycles per second on the basis of the accuracy of the digital signal In this operating mode the ERZ 2000 permanently adjusts the analog input automatically The value in coordinate AP 51 defines the permissible range for this automatic adjustment 3 OPERATING THE GAS
146. er FLOW COMPUTER SYSTEM ERZ 2000 77 Ser No Year Dry gas in standard condition 1 01325 bar 0 C Right at 0 Further data press button ID Main seal RMG MESSTECHNIK GMBH ye Germany Data logger ET2000 7 732 Ser No 05 30 Press function button 5 Archive Back with any button HA 5 P P4 Ed EH Vortex gas meter type WBZ 08 5 Locking seal 1422 Ser No wire seal Meas Analysis i av id i E gas meter type TRZ 03 E Ser No 80 03 L 20 03 Qa ka H Ki Po ES Ultrasonic gas meter type USZ 08 n 7241 ser No 01 04 o gt Z Nr 0589484 lt Front panel with main plate main seal and seal diagram gez Eckert LL ERZ 2004 gas volume corrector Date 21 02 06 RMG MESSTECHNIK GMBH with ET 2000 data logger and pes WBZ 08 vortex meter TRZ 03 turbine meter USZ 08 ultrasonic flowmeter tatus 03 07 06 ea 242 ANNEX 243 FLOW COMPUTER SYSTEM ERZ 2000 Ser No Year O Power Further data press butt O Run Main seal RMG MESSTECHNIK GMBH P nass Germany Data logger ET2000 Ser No O Alarm Press function button 5 Archive Back with any button ade I A 5 Vortex gas meter
147. ervice personal urgently required ID 04 AG 10 visible Governs whether the central exchange is able to view archive group 10 extra measured values ID 05 to ID 12 Text for identifying the corresponding archive group can be entered here b The internal device documentation contains a complete data element list for the recording entity of the ERZ 2000 see Documentation II DSfG 1 Data elements b Recording A 69 IE Remoted data transmission access Access Line Designation Value Unit B 4 Bus identification 90000000000 B 5 RDTID mmm B 6 Modem init String at Dial prefix atx3dt 13 Carrier message Suppress B 14 PTB Message suppress 1 _ 16 DSfG B IP port 800 18 Entity filter IP IE 01 RDT address modem DSfG address of the RDT unit All 30 DSfG slave addresses and the setting off are permitted here The RDT unit CANNOT be parameterized as a control station The RDT unit uses interface COMA See C 01 Corrector address for more information Previously the RDT unit was an autonomous device that simultaneously fulfilled the function of the control station In the ERZ2000 the unit cannot assume this role because two different data protocols cannot run on a single interface at the same time the master algorithm is fundamentally different from a slave algorithm Instead an entity free DSfG master was implemented on COM3 B 09 to avoid jeopardizing the stability of the
148. es are displayed permanently in the second line of the display no coordinates are only displayed when navigating in the fourth line of the display Display type of last letter J Japanese character last letter A all european character also includes Cyrillic font Note No automatic display recognition i e if EE01 Language Russian is to be used the display type W2A must be configured manually A 31 EF Processing table values Access Line Designation Value Displays the gas quality table E currently in use Defines which gas quality table is used The table contains default values for rhon ho co2 h2 meth and dv A 32 Module assembly Access Line Designation i Parameterization and display of inserted modules and modules detected by the system Used as information for automatic detection and troubleshooting This information is important for the factory assembly of device combinations or the subsequent configuration of modules Note from version 1 3 the modules must be registered in the system ANNEX 166 A 33 El Configuration Access Line Designation Value Unit S 1 Noresistmeasch 1 S 2 No Nonexcurents a 2 S 4 Nome S S 06 4 S 7 1 S GET CT NEL ME SEDI MEN me EN mug ENS EDI 27 Base value E B 30 VOS deviat ctrl no M Enter the number of connec
149. ess Cylinder pressure calibration gas 2 2 No 154 W 39 5 cyl car press Cylinder pressure carrier gas 2 No 155 W 39 6 GC room temp GC room temperature 2 No 156 W 39 7 filesys full filesystem no disc space 2 No 157 A 39 8 flow signal loss Loss of flow proportional signal 2 No 158 W 39 9 Calib failure Failure during GC6000 Calibration 1 No 159 W 40 0 GC6000 Timeout GC6000 Timeout 2 No 160 H 40 1 old totalizer Totalizer directly before setting of new value 1 No 161 H 40 2 new totalizer Totalizer directly after setting of new value 1 No 162 W 40 3 GC6000 Calibrf It is not possible to calibrate GC6000 without errors 2 No 163 A R 40 7 Rebooted Restart performed 1 No 164 A R 42 1 RTC defective Real time clock is defective 2 No 165 A 43 2 Def tot Totalizer is defective 1 No 166 H 45 0 11 inp param Current input 1 parameterization error 2 No 167 H 45 1 12 inp param Current input 2 parameterization error 2 No 168 H 45 2 13 inp param Current input 3 parameterization error 2 No 169 H 45 3 14 inp param Current input 4 parameterization error 2 No 170 H 45 4 15 inp param Current input 5 parameterization error 2 No 171 H 45 5 l6 inp param Current input 6 parameterization error 2 No 172 H 45 6 17 inp param Current input 7 parameterization error 2 No 173 H 45 7 18 inp param Current input 8 parameterization error 2 No 174 H 45 8 PT1 inp param Resistance input 1 parameterization error 2 No 175 H 45 9 PT2 inp param Resistance input 2 parameterization error
150. essure AQ 4 20mA flow A 7 AL Inside temperature of device Access Line Designation Value Unit The internal device temperature is measured in the vicinity of the analog digital converter The value can be displayed as a current output for monitoring purposes B 6 Max oper Temp 60 0 7 Min oper Temp 20 0 B 21 Correction 8 5 26 Converter value 00548000 hex Component mode It is important to know how the gas components are measured depending on the method used to calculate the coefficient CO2 H2 and N2 can be recorded individually DSfG RMG bus or current input and are only required for 88 or AGA NX 19 All other values measured by the PGC and a selection of fixed values are recorded with AGA 8 92 DC full version Only a general setting can be selected for the operating mode of these components other operating mode A 8 BA Components mode Access Line Designation Value Unit O _ In the case of AGA 8 92 DC select the operating mode for all other components table DSfG RMG bus default 146 A normalization process must be performed again to 100 after the data is received because formatting along the transfer routes can cause rounding errors The permitted tolerance must be selected here With AGA 8 92 DC there is a plausibility function to the min and max component limits This function must be activated under the superuser protection in
151. etc are processed by an A D converter with an upstream measuring point selector The adjustment on the mA side is performed in the factory Any subsequent corrections are made by directly offsetting the input quantities of pressure temperature etc Example You want to determine the correction factor for the input of the pressure at measurement conditions which is to be measured in a range from 20 to 70 bar 1st step Parameterize the lower alarm limit at 20 bar assigned to the metrological zero 0 or 4 mA 2nd step Parameterize the upper alarm limit at 70 bar assigned to the metrological upper range value of 20 mA 3rd step Parameterize the offset correction at 0 4th step Apply the pressure signal or check the current input with a calibrated measuring instrument and read the measured quantity display of the measured pressure input in bar 5th step Form the difference between the actually supplied measuring signal and the measured quantity displayed 6th step Enter this difference as offset in the offset correction parameter 7th step Check the display for pressure as measured quantity The same procedure applies to all analog inputs 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 7 Interfaces 3 7 1 Front panel Com F Com F interface RS 232 reserved for program updates flash only In normal operating mode the interface is switched off and has no function whatsoever Only if Program update mode is selected will the computer te
152. etting IB27 Modbus project the modbus registers are configured from 9000 upwards as requested by Eon Gas Transport for the Werne project A description of this standard register configuration extends beyond the scope of this device manual However the details are included in the internal device D documentation and can be accessed under Documentation III MODBUS 2 Werne Project registers from the network interface using the browser 7 ALARMS AND WARNINGS ACKNOWLEDGING EVENTS 7 Alarms and warnings acknowledging events 7 1 Functioning of alarms and warnings Warnings and alarms are indicated by a yellow warning or red alarm LED on the front of the device The warning relay or alarm relay closes parallel to this The active message is indicated by a flashing LED If the message goes the LED will turn to steady light If 74 there is more than one message at the same time the flashing light prevails For one valued messages there is only the state Message is active No coming or going is indicated and therefore the active state of these messages is retained until they are acknowledged The warning or alarm relay picks up as soon as a message comes and releases again if all messages are gone In the case of one valued messages the relays remain picked up until the messages are acknowledged 7 2 Acknowledging events Warnings and alarms have to be acknowledged by pressing the Alarms key Symbol on the Alarms key All
153. ext Extra alarm 8 with changeable short text Parameterization ignored N N N NN NN NN NN YN NN NY NNN NY NVYVN NN NN NY NY NY YH NY NH NM No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 111 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 500 H 88 1 LCD Type Speech Language setting not possible with this LCD type 1 No 501 A 89 0 JTC loss Loss of Joule Thomson coefficient 2 Yes 502 A 89 1 JTC l alarm lim Joule Thomson coefficient below lower alarm limit 2 Yes 503 A 89 2 JTC gt up alarm lim Joule Thomson coefficient exceeds upper alarm limit 2 Yes 504 W 89 3 JTC I warn lim Joule Thomson coefficient below lower warning limit 2 Yes 505 W 89 4 JTC gt up warn lim Joule Thomson coefficient exceeds upper warning limit 2 Yes 506 H 89 5 JTC param error Inconsistent parameterization Joule Thomson coefficient 1 No SC 507 A 89 6 JTC jump Joule Thomson coefficient gradient exceeds maximum 2 Yes 112 508 A 89 7 flow in close Flow in closed pipe 2 No 509 H 89 8 HART Ver old Software version HART card is to old 1 No 510 H 89 9 EXI Ver old Software version EXl card is to old 1 No 511 A R 90 0 F1 failure Frequency measurement 1 failed 2 No 512 A R 90 1 F2 failure Frequency measurement 2 failed 2 No 513 A R 90 2 F3 failure Frequency measurement 3 failed 2 No 514 A
154. f the operating modes 1 to 9 However the pulse values HFmeas HFcomp and LF do not become visible until they are needed in the operating mode Some of the following functional descriptions are only visible if the service or developer access level has been activated In order to provide a complete overview they are listed here as well Missing pulses reference pulses A differential connection alternately compares the counted pulses of the measuring and reference channels Every deviation is accumulated by the internal missing pulse counter An alarm is generated if the set limit contents missing pulses is exceeded If the limit is not exceeded within a settable period contents reference pulses the missing pulse counter is set to zero ENCO ENCODER Electronic totalizer with digital interface 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR Start up pulses The start up pulses parameter combines two functions e Suppression of fault messages of the volume input which can occur in the case of 2 channel volume measurement 1 1 when the gas meter is started up from standstill with signals which are not mechanically coupled with each other e g vortex meter Monitoring will not be activated until the start up pulses have run out e Resetting fault messages of the volume input when the device has returned to untroubled operation after the start up pulses have run out 29 Starting up and shutting down a plant Start up is troubl
155. fG logbook e Clear changes deletes the contents of the memory that documents all parameter changes e Clear archives deletes the contents of the DSfG archives for the corrector and register entity e Clear maximum value archive deletes the contents of the DSfG archives for the maximum values e Drag indic reset deletes the maximum and minimum values for all drag indicators and sets them to the current values Erasing is only possible in the Superuser access level 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 4 Function inputs 3 4 1 Distribution of unassigned inputs and outputs archive group 10 From software version 1 3 functions can be assigned to unassigned inputs and events statuses additional totalizers etc can be recorded and stored in DSfG archives DSfG archive 10 Under the Miscellaneous heading coordinates OA to OT you can find chapters Extra analog values 1 to 8 Extra messages and Extra counters 1 to 6 58 Measured values extra analog values You can assign operating modes and sources via the menu to the extra analog values this is also possible in the case of the inputs for pressure temperature etc The user can enter a name for the measured value a blank input field in line 53 provided that the user code has been entered Binary inputs extra messages Messages can be assigned to the eight contact inputs A message can be either a hint a warning or an alarm and provided with a user d
156. fault an alarm will be generated in the calibration phase It will disappear as soon as there are valid gas quality data available Options for original values pipeline gas calibration gas reference gas flushing mix retained value start up value Fields H 30 to IH 43 show the gas quality data originating directly from the PGC They relate to the stream selection and if appropriate are taken over into fields H O3 to IH 16 Furthermore original data can be forwarded to other correctors via a COM interface using the RMG bus output mode The displayed gas quality data may deviate slightly from the original PGC values due to the format On the ERZ 2000 GC a functional gas analyzer Yamatake must be connected so that archive group 8 is filled with data and can be accessed After the first analysis coordinate H01 Protocol select is set to GC 6000 automatically the archive is filled and can be accessed If the analyzer is missing however H01 is set to RMG bus by default after MAINS ON and the archive remains empty and cannot be accessed This only affects the ERZ application V 1 8 1 A 73 1 Modbus superblock Access Line Designation Value Unit Definition of data in the modbus super block Clicking Edit opens another menu that gives the option of selecting all data in the device floating point variables and measured values as modbus registers and assigning it to an address 01 See the
157. g on the preset time The functional test only delivers useful data if the flow corrector is operating smoothly and the totalizer status does not change operational inactive etc during the test If this is not the case the start and end values are not displayed and the lines containing the meter readings are hidden If only the disturbance totalizers are operating for example the stationary main totalizers are stored with a deviation 0 Make sure the test time is long enough Greater attention must be paid to the testing time of interface protocols that only send data at one second intervals ENCO DZU The same applies for LF inputs Display and stimulation of hardware states A 42 FG Hardware test no normal operation or measurement Access Line Designation Value Active ng 000 yes hardware test or stimulation 0 The display test is initiated using the coordinates 5 and 6 not shown here Alarm contact Warning contact Contact output 2 Hex Display stimulation of the state of the alarm warning and contact outputs as well as the LEDs Display of the pulses already counted on the measurement and comparison channel and the deviation if 1 2 3 4 7 PowerLED Flshes 8 RunlED n 9 OFF 10 AlarmLED On 13 HFXtesttotalizer 893762 14 HEY test totalizer 15 16 17 18 19 36 Inside temperature gt ALO1 259 e 27 109 910 Display of th
158. g the eee pen Ren area en 10 2 3 SEUNG the device tVDO 11 2 4 SOftWare eor PT M 12 2 5 Activating the device again after a software 13 2 6 Description of checksums and the activation 14 2 7 Adjusting the device to the transmitter data eee 17 2 7 1 EIE 17 2 7 2 Temperature Sensor eee erret sess sacccdesvaasedes 18 2 7 3 Gas meter volume data logging orifice 19 2 7 4 Gas quality data Ee ee RERO ERE EYE NER ERE Nan CREER Y ERE ER SERRE TERRE FEES URS 20 2 7 5 Conversion factor comparison esses eene enne nennen netten ette 22 2 7 6 Other transmitter data eet teer 22 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME 23 3 1 Description of function SENE E NUR ud 23 Em MEE 23 3 1 2 Examples for accessing and showing parameters 24 3 1 3 special case of the 0 Mode nnne 26 3 2 General informatio 26 3 2 1 How to change over totalizers to another
159. gt up alarm lim TD jump TD I warn lim TD gt up warn lim TD param error Pa loss Pa lt l alarm lim Pa gt up alarm lim Pa jump Pa l warn lim Pa gt up warn lim Pa param error sd loss sd l alarm lim sd gt up alarm lim sd jump sd l warn limit sd gt up warn lim Vo warning HW pulse comp Run deviation fault texts Long text Loss of temperature Temperature below lower alarm limit Temperature exceeds upper alarm limit Temperature gradient exceeds maximum Temperature below lower warning limit Temperature exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization temperature Loss of VOS temperature VOS temperature below lower alarm limit VOS temperature exceeds upper alarm limit VOS temperature gradient exceeds maximum VOS temperature below lower warning limit VOS temperature exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization VOS temperature Loss of density transmitter temperature Density transmitter temperature below lower alarm limit Density transmitter temperature exceeds upper alarm limit Density transmitter temperature gradient exceeds maximum Density transmitter temperature below lower warning limit Density transmitter temperature exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization density transmitter temperature Loss of absolute pressure Absolute pressure below lower alarm limit Absolute pressure exceeds upper alarm limit Absolute pressure gradient exceeds maximum A
160. gy smooth The output frequency is adapted to the current pulse quantity output in such a way that the pulses are distributed evenly The maximum output frequency is not exceeded rough The pulse quantity is output with the constant output frequency The operating mode of the contact determines the source that switches the contact In pot hat value gt max or value min operating modes a physical measurement variable must be assigned under Assignment edit Furthermore the min and or max threshold values must be defined in these operating modes lines 6 and 7 228 Allows inversion of the contact function Determines the lower threshold value of the physical variable at which the contact switches The value is entered in the unit displayed in line 2 physical value The lower threshold is only effective in hat pot and value gt min operating modes Determines the upper threshold value of the physical variable at which the contact switches The value is entered in the unit displayed in line 2 physical value The upper threshold value is only effective in hat pot and value lt max operating mode Example of a threshold switch that switches from high to low pot and is assigned to the pressure Access Line Designation Value Unit A 96 MR Frequency output channel 1 terminal X2 7 X2 8 Access Line Designation Value Unit mm A8 1 Curr Freq
161. he calculated values are automatically transferred to the hardware pulse comparison logic Reference blades Y Display integer ratio of Kv reference channel to Kv measuring channel projected to approx 200 pulses The calculated values are automatically transferred to the hardware pulse comparison logic Better HF channel Display comparison of the frequencies of the measuring and reference channels for the higher value Predictive reliability This parameter indicates how often the comparison from the Better HF channel function must provide the better value until a changeover is made Decision change It is shown how often the device has made a decision in favour of the other channel USZ effect of fault It is shown whether USZ protocol errors DZU protocol are signalled as alarm or warning or whether they are not signalled This depends on the selected operating mode Monitoring of synchronous run coordinates JK There is a chapter Synchronous run monitoring to be found under the 0 Mode key Here you can find the parameters for monitoring synchronous run such as the maximum deviation termination short and termination quantity and information displayed about the current state of the ongoing comparison 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR Monitoring of synchronous run deals with software comparisons between the possible inputs for volume formation Comparisons are possible if two or three inputs are used Comparison
162. he SMART transmitter 96 8 1 6 Analog Outputs retient eene 96 8 1 7 Other Outputs iio o dS 96 mE Digttal VortotaliZeM 98 8 1 9 Specifications of the embedded 520 100 CONTENTS 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS siccsisevesteavsnscseassdcevexscsetesteracsicasevetense 101 10 OPTIONAL EXPLOSION PROTECTED INPUT 115 10 1 Operating instructions for the installer eese eene 115 11 ELECTRICAL 116 Ji Config ration variants sevo ee surdi vt pub ntes CS EE SESS UPS RUNE 116 11 2 Terminal Gia BEANS uos en ERU 116 11 2 1 Rear panel of the nennen nennen nenne nein nnne 116 11 2 2 Assignment of terminals rice er eret ttt aee eere epa Haga 117 11 2 3 Pin assignments for COM 1 COM 2 COM COM 4 and COM 5 122 11 2 4 EX input NAMUR signals connection options of the measuring input as an example 124 11 2 5 Wiring examples standard 1 4 125 DEEP cem UNION 133 11 3 1 DSfG connecto
163. hich supports the RFC 868 protocol then you can use it You can find the relevant settings for port 37 server for time protocol as per RFC868 and the IP address and connection type for the time protocol server UDP or TCP under IA TCP IP network in lines 22 and 23 Another option is to connect GPS receiver modules of any manufacturer to the COM 5 modem interface The ERZ 2000 knows the following protocols NMEA 0183 Meinberg Standard SAT Standard Uni Erlangen ABB SPA Computime and RACAL Another option is the synchronization to reference time which can be parameterized with the coordinates KC 51 Reference hour KC 52 Reference minute and KC 53 Reference second This procedure is triggered through a contact input which can be selected via KC 21 Source time contact 3 9 4 Determining the ON time for the display To allow the display to be read under optimum conditions it has been permanently set to maximum brightness In input mode the line to be edited will turn darker to indicate that input mode is active To increase the service life of the display the ERZ 2000 switches its display dark as soon as a settable period of time has elapsed after the last key was pressed You can find the function where you can set this time under the 0 Mode key Display chapter Screen saver function 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 10 ET 2000 integrated data logger for maximum values The ERZ 2000 automatically forms maximum values from th
164. ht saving time and back and with an external synchronization input 4 signal inputs for switching and L group gases changing the direction and for external freeze Spare signal inputs Uploading operating programs is possible if the calibration switch has been opened Integrated DSfG remote data transmission unit PTB s time service for time synchronization 1 INTRODUCTION 1 4 Device structure The ERZ 2000 system is characterized by a simple structure comprising only a few components There is a distinct separation between the individual functions data logging volume correction recording and basic tasks _ Hardware Measurement Accuracy 4 The base module is responsible for ensuring accuracy with volume calculation tasks All parameters relevant to accuracy are assigned to this card and are also stored on this card This card defines the base accuracy of the device with its accuracy and resolution of inputs and outputs and its temperature sensitivity The digital data interfaces are located on the base module These interfaces can be used for Service interface e DSfG in accordance with the current specification for volume corrector and recording entities e DSfG master e CAN bus for internal communications between the modules or for external extension Printer connection optional e Modbus for external data transmissions Ethernet TCP IP network connections e Connection of an external modem
165. ial inputs MRG functions level 1 z Data elements OK Archive group 11 DSfG revision or official functional test OL Archive group 12 DSfG revision or official functional test OM Archive group 13 DSfG revision or official functional test ON Archive group 14 DSfG revision or official functional test QU Archive group 21 Logbook plus audit trail OV Archive group 22 Maximum values per day hour value OW Archive group 23 Maximum values per month hour and day value OX Archive group 24 Maximum values per year hour day value A different setting must be selected for the corresponding measured value operating mode so that the 0 average values for pressure temperature etc appear in the archives and archive groups 1 If a measured input operates in Random mode no entries are generated in the archives and logbook 0 when alarms come go 5 2 5 Archive depth DSfG archives Archive group 1 2 3 4 8 2048 entries then the oldest entry is overwritten Archive group 7 512 entries then the oldest entry is overwritten Archive group 9 4096 entries then the oldest entry is overwritten Archive group 10 21 2048 entries then the oldest entry is overwritten Archive group 11 12 13 14 4 entries are rewritten each time Archive group 22 180 entries then the oldest entry is overwritten Archive group 23 36 entries then the oldest entry is overwritten Archive group 24 10 entries then the oldest entry
166. id external heating due to exposure to sunlight or other sources of heat The intrinsically safe circuits are to be installed in compliance with the installer s specifications When interconnecting intrinsically safe field devices and intrinsically safe circuits of the relevant devices of the ERZ 2000 make sure that the appropriate maximum values of the field device and the relevant device concerned are observed with regard to explosion protection The EC certificate of conformity or prototype test certificate is to be observed It is of particular importance to comply with the Special conditions possibly contained therein Putting the device into service The plug is to be installed properly on the appropriate mating socket and secured mechanically Operation is only permitted if the housing is completely closed Servicing maintenance The fuses of the device may be replaced only if the device is completely disconnected and volt free This device may be repaired only by RMG Messtechnik GmbH Removal During removal make sure that the sensor cable does not come into contact with other live parts Make sure that you take appropriate precautions 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 11 Electrical connections 11 1 Configuration variants Due to the compact structure of the ERZ 2000 the assignment of terminals is mainly fixed There is a zone for spare terminals which requires a different definition of terminal assignments depending on the expansion
167. iding or showing as with the User level and the service staff can view all values even those which are not needed in the current operating mode The topmost level is the Developer In this mode additional auxiliary quantities and intermediate values are shown which may be useful for diagnostic purposes if a fault occurs From version 1 7 the Data input visibility level has been introduced as an extension or input assistance feature Here only parameters are shown which can be adjusted all the other values are hidden You can select the visibility level with the lt O gt Mode key in the Display chapter HB We would recommend setting the visibility level at Service before you start to parameterize the device 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 2 4 Entering the user code The lowest access level is protected by the user code The code is divided into two 4 character parts and has to be entered in two subsequent coordinates In the operating instructions the relevant data are marked for user lock A special case is the marking C for the user code itself To enter the user code press 0 Mode and enter the code in the Access chapter under the Codeword 1 and Codeword 2 functions 10 Mode The arrow is already located on the third line on Access In Lo Base values this example pressing Enter will select the correct chapter Billing mode A new window will open with the Access heading Use the Cursor Down key to select the first c
168. ignals of the IGM measuring heads are directly connected to the volume corrector via a Modbus connection The volume corrector interface to be used for this purpose is COM 1 By enabling the relevant software function the ultrasonic controller is activated and no additional hardware is required If one of the four possible device variants with an ultrasonic controller ERZ 2004 USC ERZ 2104 USC ERZ 2002 USC or ERZ 2102 USC has been selected further functional units have to be observed 34 L FH Ultrasonic flowmeter diagnosis This function has been intended to display diagnostic values not only when the US 9000 has been connected but also for the ERZ 2xxx USC types here only fields 3 to 32 The display comprises averaged mean values unit gas velocities of paths 1 to 6 velocities of sound of paths 1 to 6 AGC level for upstream and downstream the quality of measurement indication of valid measured values in percent alarm states and indication of the messages of the US 9000 GI Ultrasonic volume transmitter GM Reynolds number correction ultrasonic flowmeter GN Base correction ultrasonic flowmeter GO Error curve linearization ultrasonic flowmeter GP Impact of the corrections GQ IGM 1 ID display GR IGM 2 ID display These functions provide detailed information about the ultrasonic GS IGM 3 ID display transmitter the sensors and their performance For a detailed GT IGM 4 ID display description
169. il the ERZ2000 automatically calls the number specified above is displayed here IE 10 The time that the device waits if the number is engaged for example appears here Another call SS attempt is made once this time has elapsed 56 Example Manual triggering Overwriting the displayed remaining time with the number 2 initiates a call after 2 seconds If the call was successful and a plausible time was heard the value in IE09 is set to 90000 seconds i e the next attempted call takes place in 25 hours If the line was engaged or the time was implausible the value in IE10 e g 300 seconds is applied and the ERZ 2000 counts down to 0 before making another call attempt 3 3 6 Second PT100 e Remove the housing cover e Configure the hardware using socket strip X45 inside the device at the back on the left between module slots 2 and 3 gid 92 UOQAAM ASIAM 4 A OO 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR e Setthe solder bridges PT100 1 PT100 1 and 2 E 11 e Connect PT100 PT100 1 X5 7 8 9 10 PT100 2 X6 7 8 9 10 e Parameterize the measurement El Configuration S 1 No resistmeasoh rNumber 3 3 7 Deleting archives logbooks change memories etc Under the heading Mode key lt 0 gt the section Erasing procedures is located Here you have the option of selectively resetting saved values The following functions are available e Clear log deletes the contents of the DS
170. in a relative density The relative density must therefore be calculated in the actual corrector Parameterize the operating mode for the relative density calculated from the standard density The AGA8 compatible query allows all conversion factor calculations The GERG compatible query is only used when the gas quality measurement does not support the AGA8 compatible query old devices or when the measuring principle for the gas quality measurement does not deliver a full or adequate analysis correlative procedure IG 50 Ignoring allowed Defines the response of the ERZ 2000 to analysis end messages from gas quality measuring devices GCs for no GC Take into account and process analysis end messages normal scenario only for GC Ignore analysis end messages from GC1 only for GC2 Ignore analysis end messages from GC2 for both GCs Ignore analysis end messages from GC1 and GC2 IG 48 GQM1 ignore time and IG 49 GOM2 ignore time allow the user to parameterize the ignore time for each gas quality measuring device It is possible to assign 2 gas quality measuring devices for example two PGCs on the DSfG bus redundantly to the flow corrector If both PGCs are operating without interruption the flow corrector always uses the main PGC in line with DSfG regulations In the event of a malfunction in the main PGC evaluation of bit string the flow corrector uses the measured values from the comparator PGC until the main PGC is operating cor
171. in slot 3 and plug the connecting cables onto the posts of X9 and X10 Foundation fieldbus adapter in slot 3 75 x CS eS CT Cal 7 E03 Ga 2 I 4 GC 6000 Detailed view of the X9 and X10 connectors 76 0 11 ead THU 4 GC 6000 77 Ausgang 1 Rackwandstecker 1 Ausgang 2 Rear connector E To the isolating amplifier MC72 42Ex T 2 Ausgang 3 Terminal block for field 2 devices Ausgang 4 4 Ausgang 5 5 rman Ausgang Innut antant Anschl Innnt 7 Terminal block for field Innnt autnit R devices Fieldhiie GC ANNA 4 GC 6000 4 4 Parameterization To activate the GC 6000 functionality make the following settings EH Module assembly 78 AD Superior calorific value AE Standard density BA Components mode al al IH Gas quality imported via GC6000 or RMG bus CL gt a IL GC6000 M P 6 GC6000 maintenance Normal run B 7 max mainten time min B 9 max flushing B 12 Calibration cycle B 13 Calib time base 01 01 2009 0 30 B 15 Calibr duration min B 16 Ana to Startupcal 4 GC 6000 IN GC6000 cylinder rack and control panel B 1seeyicttemp Bsveevictpress Baseoncapess b The settings of
172. ing an external modem 1 Modem type An industrial modem supplied by Phoenix type PSI DATA FAX Modem RS232 is used as standard 2 Connection The ERZ2000 is connected to the external modem via a fully configured RS232 cable i e all 9 pins are used 1 1 It does not function if a basic version of cable is used with only pins 2 3 and 5 configured The COM 5 interface is used 3 Configuration The modem can retain the factory configuration all DIL switches set to OFF The Modem Init string and the dialing prefix on the ERZ 2000 must be set according to the local conditions 4 Example of a setting In the function DSfG RDT IE06 Modem Init string ateOsO 1 IEO7 Dialing prefix atx3dt Meaning at Prefix for a command line Echo function deactivated S0 1 Setregister O to 1 i e number of ring tones before the modem answers and establishes a connection should be 1 x3 Reply setting Hayes Smartmodem 300 compatible answers blind dialing extension plus all CONNECT answers plus detection of engaged tone dt Tone dialing method dp pulse dialing method If a different modem is used different commands may be issued in which case please consult the manual provided by the manufacturer 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 3 5 Time synchronization via PTB time service For times KA 10 select PTB service For DSfG RDT IEO8 Enter the telephone number of the PTB 00531512038 IEO9 PTB trigger The remaining time in seconds unt
173. ing of the male Cannon connector is connected electrically to the device casing 11 3 2 A DSfG bus termination Both ends of the DSfG bus have to be electrically closed terminated For this purpose there are two 8 pin DIP switches on the DSfG interface card They are used to connect the terminating resistors of the bus and the power supply to the connector The switch on the left side of the card is dedicated to the corrector and recording entities while the switch on the right side is dedicated to the master if available In normal DSfG operation typical German application the COM 3 interface is used for the function of the master and the COM 4 interface is used for the function of the corrector and recording entities The interfaces are electrically isolated and comply with the DSfG specification In order to meet the specification with regard to the bus supply and the quiescent levels it is possible to activate the resistors and the voltage via DIL switches The terminating resistor has been deliberatively omitted on the card since it has to be placed at one end of the trunk cable in compliance with the specification Thus it is to be placed externally on the cable or even better on the hub If the function of the master is additionally activated in an ERZ 2000 a cable is to be taken to the hub not only from COM 4 but also from COM 3 The relevant DIL switches have to be switched on The cut out in the cover sheet of the corrector enables the
174. ion options Set the operating mode in the AN Isentropic exponent chapter coordinate AN 03 at AGA 10 Recommended for a complete analysis and AGA 8 92 DC Polynomial T P Polynomial of the 9th order with default values specified by e on Ruhrgas Kobza Formula 36 If the isentropic exponent is to be used as a fixed value in the calculation select Default Joule Thomson coefficient If the Joule Thomson coefficient is to be calculated and used as a running measured value in flow rate calculation there are two calculation options Set the operating mode in the AO Joule Thomson coefficient chapter coordinate AO 03 at 10 Recommended for a complete analysis 8 92 DC Polynomial T P Polynomial of the 9th order with default values specified by e on Ruhrgas To use the Joule Thomson coefficient in the computational procedure select ISO 5167 2003 among the calculation methods under GV Orifice plate in line 11 If the Joule Thomson coefficient is to be used as a fixed value in the calculation select Default In the Differential pressure chapter coordinates AP 01 set the parameters for the differential pressure sensors Here you can find the following parameters for three measuring cells AP 01 to AP 07 show general information on selected measuring ranges and the interaction of the measuring cells in the transitional areas from a small to a large cell AP 10 Operating mode with the m
175. ion values for the standard density and superior calorific value measuring inputs It is possible to define or assign functions to buttons and set the maximum monitoring time The measuring gas test gas button initiates the formation of the holding value and the button for forming the correction value initiates the calculation of the correction value The procedure is monitored for maximum limits and maximum time 3 2 11 4 Functional test Similar to the DSfG revision there are four points of time which define the start the interval and the end of a data recording procedure When the first point of time is reached the volume corrector automatically starts data recording forms the mean values etc until the next point of time is reached and stops recording when the last point of time is reached A direct start can be activated manually via the keyboard To do this press the lt 6 gt Test key and then the Cursor Down key until you reach the Functional test chapter Select this chapter and start the procedure by pressing Enter in the Status function The results are to be found in archives 11 12 and 13 and they carry the DSfG designations A better option for reading these results in plain text is to use the browser of your laptop 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR Setting times Test time defines the duration of testing Time forerun tracking defines the waiting time between the start time and the test time and between the end of the tes
176. ions are not suitable for Wider Ranges of Application they are identified as inadequate here A quality statement is then no longer possible It is possible to set the message H80 3 AGA8 lt gt range AGA8 lt gt range for instances when a preselected quality range is breached See also the parameter gasCtrl Can only be used meaningfully when a full analysis is present CC11 GC1 2 calculation This value is only active in the operating mode 05 88 5 8 92DC and GC1 GC2 In the first two modes it remains on GERG 88 S or AGA 8 92DC constantly In GC1 GC2 operating mode main and reference gas quality the value is determined by whether a full analysis is available AGA 8 92DC or is not available GERG 88 S for the gas quality sensor currently selected The value then selects the equation of state for the correction and suppresses the fault evaluation for the unselected equation of state The value can also be used to control the billing mode See also 4 CC12 Propane criterion Checks the rule of thirds relating to propane The rule of thirds determines whether the conversion factor calculation via 88 S is permitted for gas See also CC13 The message H78 1 G486 violated DVGW G486 1 3 rule violated Gas is not GERG compatible may be displayed to indicate that the rule has been violated See also CC14 CC13 Butane criterion Checks the rule of thirds relating to butane and
177. ior calorific value is taken from a table as a fixed value ISO 6976 The superior calorific value is calculated from the components Modbus The superior calorific value is written in the ERZ 2000 by the Modbus master GPA 2172 96 Another US calculation rule for Hs and rd at 60 F and under 14 696 psia To make your settings use the cursor key to browse to the Operating mode function Set the desired operating mode there after having opened the calibration lock Depending on the input quantities there may be further operating modes e g for the standard density from relative density Calculation from relative density Single frequency input Frequency transmitter with one frequency RMG standard density transmitter Frequency transmitter with two frequencies etc 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION If the measuring device is to be operated using the HART protocol make sure that the operating mode is set to Measured value Source value and a current input combined with the HART function is selected as source If the measuring device is operated as a transmitter make sure that the power supply is enabled in the associated menu of the current input The menu of the data sources comprises all metrological options of an input irrespective of whether or not these signals e g current or frequency signal analogous to the measured quantity exist for the selected transmitter 21 DSfG The gas quality data are read in accordance with DSfG ru
178. ister addresses are referenced to 0 zero E g if register 2000 is queried on the interface coordinate IB 17 Register offset 0 is to be set e Totalizers and disturbance totalizers comply with billing mode 1 90 e Standard density superior calorific value hydrogen and carbon dioxide can be described via Modbus To use the values for correction set the mode of the relevant measured value input at EGO Modbus There is no specific EGO interface mode e mode only makes sense in conjunction with 88 e EGO mode does not function with billing modes 2 3 and 4 e EGO mode does not function with 14 digit totalizers e EGO mode relies on fixed units m3 kWh m3 h kW kg m3 mol bar degree Celsius Meaning of the alarm status in register 2032 0 No alarm Hardware fault s of the corrector Hardware fault s of pulse detection Limit fault s of volume measurements Hardware limit fault s of other transmitters GERG limit violation 6 Other alarms 7 to 9 Spare Aninitialization value float 999999 is agreed upon for the standard density superior calorific value hydrogen and carbon dioxide This value will be sent by the Modbus master in such cases where there is no measured value available yet 6 4 Modbus Transgas The IB27 Modbus project coordinates enable the project specific configuration of the modbus registers from 9000 upwards The Transgas setting must be selected to exchange data with a bu
179. it N2 lt gt AGA limit Hs lt gt AGA limit H2 lt gt AGA limit AGA oth errors AGA pi tau Vo transmitter shows unexpected behaviour No more signal from Vo transmitter Vo protocol error Stored pulses were deleted Current input 9 parameterization error Current input 10 parameterization error Current input 11 parameterization error Current input 12 parameterization error Flow rate at base conditions below lower warning limit Flow rate at meas conditions exceeds upper warning limit Corrected flow rate at meas conditions below lower warning limit Corrected flow rate at meas conditions exceeds upper warning limit Volumetric flow rate at base conditions below lower warning limit Volumetric flow rate at base conditions exceeds upper warning limit Energy flow rate below lower warning limit Energy flow rate exceeds upper warning limit Mass flow rate below lower warning limit Mass flow rate exceeds upper warning limit CAN bus timeout Modem is defective or switched off am a device which has not been tested Resistance measurement 1 shows open circuit Resistance measurement 2 shows open circuit Primary value for conversion factor calculation is missing Resistance input 3 parameterization error Resistance input 4 parameterization error Temperature exceeds GERG limits Pressure exceeds GERG limits Relative density exceeds GERG limits Carbon dioxide exceeds GERG limits Nitrogen exceeds GERG limits Superior calorific valu
180. iteria that must be answered YES NO to lead to a decision 1 formal official display values are written 2 formal official display values are read 3 formal generally global variables are written 4 formal generally global variables are read The program makeich evaluates these 5 criteria and generates the identification list part of the approval documentation Each of these programs has a checksum CRC that is determined at the time of compilation The list for the custody transfer kernel can be read in detail so that each of these individual programs can be tested on the device in case of doubt A total checksum is formulated from the source of the official kernel and stored in a separate memory area This is the first checksum for the device Programs that adopt customer specific system specific functions are known as applications and are situated outside of the custody transfer framework The official kernel and application combine to form the overall system which is used to determine a separate checksum CRC The procedure for calculating a checksum is identical to the current procedure used on official devices without software separation This is the second checksum for the device There is another checksum which is calculated by multiplying the checksum of the official kernel by the checksum of the overall system This is the third checksum also known as the activation key If customer specific software adaptation takes p
181. itter x y Vo HF2 chan X Y 9 2 channel HF transmitter x y with ENCO HF2 chan X Y Vo 10 2 channel HF transmitter 1 1 HF2 chan 1 1 11 2 channel HF transmitter x y HF2 chan X Y 12 2 channel HF transmitter LF transmitter HF LF 13 1 channel HF transmitter HF 1 chan 14 1 channel LF transmitter LF 1 chan 15 US9000 ultrasonic flowmeter remote unit DZU 16 Integrated ultrasonic controller IGM 17 Orifice plate Orifice 18 Flow 4 20 mA 4 20 mA Volume transmitter mode Asto the modes 1 to 9 the notation means The first parameter applies to billing and the second J parameter to comparison If ENCO stands at the beginning for example Vm increments are calculated from the telegram contents of the digital totalizer i e the Vm totalizer is calculated from ENCO information However if ENCO stands at the end Vm is calculated normally from HF or LF signals and Vo is displayed and archived only additionally Note also the following with regard to signalling alarms or warnings If ENCO stands at the beginning of a 2 channel operating mode operating mode 6 or 8 then as far as the HF measuring inputs stand at the end and if there is a missing pulse or a pulse comparison fault no alarm will be outputted but a warning with a separate message number The operating modes 1 to 17 are described in more detail in the next section The Vo totalizers will become visible in the coordinates as soon as ENCO is activated in one o
182. ity corrector energy ERZ 2102 USC e Orifice plate flowcomputer P T energy ERZ 2014 2114 e Orifice plate flowcomputer density energy ERZ 2012 2112 can be switched over by the customer from one version to another after the calibration lock has been opened To do this you have to be on the topmost access level superuser Press 0 Mode select the Base values chapter and then the Device type function to browse the variants Press Enter to confirm your selection or change over to another variant only operate the version which has been set in the factory and corresponds to the type plate fixed to the front panel The device can only be changed over from a PTZ corrector to a superior calorific value corrector if the software is changed in the factory L If the device is used for custody transfer applications this changeover option is disabled and you can Fre 11 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 4 Software update Required tools e Null modem cable e PC with serial interface COM and terminal emulation program e g Hyperterm e HEXLoad exe renamed from EX to EXE Windows program for loading the Flow Computer Bios FCB 12 2 Procedure Measurement Make sure the condition of your measuring station is safe If possible make sure the relevant flow computer is flow free because correction does not take place during the software update and any accumulated quantities m are ignored completely Updating the flow co
183. keys If the arrow is located on the value displayed for the pressure at measurement conditions for example you can now press Enter to directly jump to the functions through which you can browse using the cursor keys Example Press lt 1 gt Meas PT to display the following overview 16 257 bar The arrow is located on the first line and can be moved 8 231 upwards or downwards using the cursor keys In this example pressing Enter will select the Absolute Pressure 9 529 kWh m3 0 7786 kg m3 chapter A new window will open with the Absolute Pressure heading The contents of this chapter can be browsed using the cursor keys Example Totalizers Key Totalizer If you press 7 Totalizer the display will jump to showing all available totalizers The number of totalizers is determined dynamically in accordance with the mode settings and the state of the device There is an arrow gt displayed in front of the short designation of the first totalizer which can be moved upwards or downwards using the cursor keys If the arrow is located on the totalizer displayed for the volume at measurement conditions in billing mode 1 for example you can now press Enter to directly jump to the Totalizer BM 1 chapter Here you can reach the functions coordinates of interest to you using the cursor keys 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR Example Analytical values Key Analysis If you press 2 Analysis the display will jump to
184. lace outside of the official kernel the second checksum and the activation key change accordingly After the new software has been imported the inspector can check that the official kernel has remained unchanged during the software adaptation by entering storing the activation key The flow corrector calculates the activation key for the new program and shows the value on the display If the calculated key and the stored key do not correspond an alarm is signaled and the disturbance totalizers are actuated The program that calculates the key is a component of the custody transfer kernel 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION Overall application Official kernel Application 15 Example Official kernel Overall application CRC ECDAHex 16FD Hex 356831090 Dec Source criteria include e Coding official e coding official e Name e Checksum e Date time e Size e History description The program makeich inspects all files according to the above criteria and then generates the identification file readable file makeich is an official source but is not involved in the actual activities of the flow corrector in any way It is merely installed on the PC in the development environment and is not included in the executable code Another feature of makeich is the compilation of information about the official kernel in machine readable format which is then incorporated in the corrector program 2 GETTING STARTED OPER
185. lation is to be made between the individual points Instead of the constant meter factor KV the corrected meter factor KVc is used for further calculation or correction E Kv Kv 1 52 100 The interpolation points load points and the deviation from the zero line to be taken from the error curve of the turbine gas meter Thus the corrected volumetric flow rate at measurement conditions is calculated using the following formula Qvmc 3600 Vc QVmc Corrected volumetric flow rate at measurement conditions m3 h KVc Corrected meter factor of the gas meter P m3 fv Frequency of the volume transducer of the gas meter Hz KV Uncorrected meter factor of the gas meter P m3 Entries can be made in any order since the volume corrector sorts them automatically 3 2 14 1 NAMUR sensor adjustment optional with built in NAMUR isolating device The integrated isolating device can be adjusted manually or in a predefined way to the HF probes in the trigger threshold and the switching hysteresis This simple method by pressing a button replaces the relatively inconvenient adjustment by using a potentiometer There are three options for performing the adjustment Standard NAMUR Standardized trigger threshold and hysteresis are loaded RMG pick off factory settings Special trigger threshold and hysteresis are loaded Manual adjustment Trigger value and hysteresis can be adjusted finely a
186. le phones Function keys Key legend Measured values P T 1 2 8 to directly display the Orifice 3 most important inputs outputs 4 measured values Use Archive 5 the keys 3 4 5 6 9 and Test 6 0 to access the relevant Totalizer 7 headings and chapter Flow Rates 8 overviews The key for Meter 9 Select will always show Mode 0 the current chapter Use ID the key to go back to Select selects a chapter Backspace function Alarms displays or clears messages D the last 50 times you have pressed a key 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 2 Coordinate system levels and rights of access visibility levels 2 2 1 Coordinate system All variables and measured and calculated values are grouped into several tables in order to show associated functions Each table represents a matrix with fields from AA 01 to AZ 99 or BA 01 to BZ 99 or CA 01 to CZ 99 etc All tables together form the coordinate system Tabular structure Each table has a name which appears as chapter heading Each column has a chapter name while the fields coordinates are the functions Example Mode Chapter heading name of the table Base values PB select TB select TM select Billing mode Current plain text urrent billing mode Revision mode Codeword 1 Codeword 2 g Access Display Language User profile The 0 Mode key shown in the example above enables central access to the chapter headings
187. les in the rhythm of the analyses from the gas chromatograph or alternatively from the correlative gas measuring device Option Current input If the superior calorific value standard density and CO2 quantities are sufficient for calculating the K coefficient GERG 88S AGA NX 19 AGA 8 Gross 1 then you can use the Current input operating mode The current inputs measured by the base module are evaluated by the arithmetic logic unit Table There are four tables with fixed values for direction 1 or 2 or billing modes 1 to 4 which can be written either manually on the device or by remote control via DSfG Modbus Modbus RTU via RS 232 serial interface or RS 485 bus Alternatively Modbus IP via Ethernet with a GOM gas quality manager Siemens PCS 7 with special program To activate the Modbus IP set the parameter Eisen 2 on Yes Please refer to Main gas quality imported via Modbus RMG bus RMG specific protocol on the basis of MODBUS The PGC is the master and the ERZ 2000 is a slave Up to 32 slaves can receive gas quality data at the same time by broadcasting New normalization mode Under BA Components mode there are 2 modes Total balanced 100 normalization Methane balanced All components will be retained only methane will be adjusted gt Methane 100 other components 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 7 5 Conversion factor comparison Under CM Conversion factor comparison it is possible
188. limit Decane exceeds upper warning limit Hydrogen sulphide below lower warning limit Hydrogen sulphide exceeds upper warning limit Water below lower warning limit Water exceeds upper warning limit Helium below lower warning limit Helium exceeds upper warning limit Oxygen below lower warning limit Oxygen exceeds upper warning limit Carbon monoxide below lower warning limit Carbon monoxide exceeds upper warning limit Ethene below lower warning limit Ethene exceeds upper warning limit Propene below lower warning limit Propene exceeds upper warning limit Argon below lower warning limit Argon exceeds upper warning limit connection lost RMG Bus Inconsistent parameterization RMG Bus Inconsistent parameterization DSfG can t initialize TCPIP sockets low grade software code detected file system unexpected behaviour N NNN NN NN NN NN YN NNN NN NN NY NN NN NN NY NY NN FS NY NY NY NY No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No 107 108 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 64 6 64 7 64 8 64 9 65 0
189. limit Isentropic coefficient exceeds upper alarm limit Isentropic coefficient gradient exceeds maximum Loss of Joule Thomson coefficient Joule Thomson coefficient below lower alarm limit Joule Thomson coefficient exceeds upper alarm limit Joule Thomson coefficient gradient exceeds maximum GC components for complete analysis are bad USZ transmitter signalizes an alarm No more signal from USZ transmitter Mathematical error corrupt code detected hard wired contact of volume transmitter shows alarm Loss of relative density Relative density below lower alarm limit Relative density exceeds upper alarm limit Relative density gradient exceeds maximum Vb Vn Vb Vn Vn P T Vn P T Vn T Vb Vn Vb Vn Vb Vn dP Vb Vn dP Vb Vn dP Vn dP Vb Vn dP Vb Vn dP Vb Vn dP Vn dP Gbh Gbh Gbh Gbh Gbh Vn Vb Vn Vb Vn Vn dP Vn dP Vn dP Vn dP Vb Vn Vb Vn Vn dP Vn dP Vn dP Vn dP Vn T dP Vn T dP Vn T dP Vn T dP Vn Gbh Vb Vn Vb Vn Vb Vn Vb Vn Vb Vn Gbh Gbh Gbh Gbh 6 MODBUS 574 A 575 A 576 A 577 A 578 A 579 A 580 A 581A 582 A 583 A 584 A 585 A 586 A 587 A 588 A 589 A 593 A 596 597 A 599 A 601 A 602 A 96 8 96 9 97 0 97 1 97 2 97 3 97 4 97 5 97 6 97 7 97 8 97 9 98 0 98 1 98 2 98 3 98 7 99 2 99 3 99 5 99 7 99 8 sd GC timeout rd GC timeout CO2 GC timeout N2 GC timeout H2 GC timeout Hs GC alarm sd GC alarm rd GC alarm CO2 GC alarm N2 GC alarm H2 GC alarm Beattie alarm C
190. low Energy Corr vol meas Volumetric flow Alarm LED Options Warning LED Options Control bits Modbus year Modbus month Modbus day Modbus hour Modbus minute Modbus second Fuel gas value Standard density CO2 Modb sync year Modb sync month 6 MODBUS 0 8880 kg m3 126843 MWh 447724 M3 9803707 m3 21422 MWh 92001 m3 1869267 m3 on off on flashes off off on flashes 0000 hex 2010 24 13 30 49 12 000 kWh m3 0 8880 kg m3 1 00000 mol 2010 3F 63 53 F8 00 01 EF 7B 00 06 D4 EC 00 95 97 BB 00 00 53 AE 00 01 67 61 00 1C 85 D3 00 00 00 01 00 00 07 DA 00 06 00 18 00 OD 00 1E 00 31 4140 00 00 3F 63 53 F8 3F 80 00 00 07 DA 00 06 91 6 MODBUS Amd Example of alternative configuration IB Serial interfaces AD Fuel gas value AE Standard density BA Components mode T C KC External time signal i Sm l T RTmesmeteeme iver 3H 6 MODBUS Notes e Bus coupler only synchronizes time and date of corrector in a 30 second time base e n order to write Ho Rhon and CO2 to the bus coupler the factors D13 D14 and D15 must be considered e B27 Modbus project parameterization Transgas is only available from device software version 1 9 1 93 6 5 Eon Gas Transport Modbus With the s
191. low rate Ovmi Instead of the constant meter factor KV the corrected meter factor KVc is used for further calculation or correction kekit 100 The polynomial coefficients An are supplied by the manufacturer of the turbine gas meter b Error curve linearization with polynomial related to the Reynolds number Correction is made using a quartic polynomial which reproduces the error curve of the gas meter as a function of the Reynolds number Error equation ERe A 2 Re 2 A 1 Re 1 A0 A1 Re A2 Re2 Reynolds number equation Re 0 353677 Qm DN p n where p pb P Tb Pb T 1 K ERe Deviation of the error curve Re Reynolds number An Constants KV Constant meter factor The polynomial coefficients An n 2 to n 2 are calculated from the measured value pairs error Ei and flow rate Rei Instead of the constant meter factor KV the corrected meter factor KVc is used for further calculation or correction Further entries are n V 10 6 m s V constant for natural gas V 12 e CLIE 100 The polynomial coefficients An are supplied by the manufacturer of the turbine gas meter 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR c Error curve linearization using the interpolation point method This method uses 16 parameterizable interpolation points The selected loads are to be entered on the X axis flow rate For each interpolation point the deviation from the zero line is to be entered A linear interpo
192. lt gt AGA limit P lt gt AGA limit rd lt gt AGA limit CO2 lt AGA limit N2 lt gt AGA limit Hs lt gt AGA limit H2 lt gt AGA limit AGA oth errors AGA pi tau Interp pt probl illegal Channel 1 fault Channel 2 fault Tc Tb comb Power OFF Channel 3 fault Channel 4 fault sd failure 2IV NMA ADC NMA overload NMA OC PT100 VSB below lower alarm limit VSB exceeds upper alarm limit VSB gradient exceeds maximum Loss of gauge pressure Gauge pressure below lower alarm limit Gauge pressure exceeds upper alarm limit Gauge pressure gradient exceeds maximum Loss of nitrogen Nitrogen below lower alarm limit Nitrogen exceeds upper alarm limit Nitrogen gradient exceeds maximum Official character of custody transfer GC data violated Van der Waals iteration is running amok Loss of flow proportional signal Real time clock is defective Totalizer is defective CAN bus timeout Primary value for conversion factor calculation is missing Temperature exceeds GERG limits Pressure exceeds GERG limits Relative density exceeds GERG limits Carbon dioxide exceeds GERG limits Nitrogen exceeds GERG limits Superior calorific value exceeds GERG limits Hydrogen exceeds GERG limits Maximum permissible GERG iterations exceeded Temperature exceeds AGA limits Pressure exceeds AGA limits Relative density exceeds AGA limits Carbon dioxide exceeds AGA limits Nitrogen exceeds AGA limits Superior calorific value exceeds AGA limits Hydrogen exceeds A
193. ltz Access Line Designation Value Unit The AGA 10 allows the calculation of other variables required for the measurement of orifices for example that were previously available either as a fixed value or approximation equation A 18 DC Transport phenomina Access Line Designation Value Unit 1 7886 Kin viscosity B dyn viscosity B divided by the density Therm conduct B thermal conductivity Geometry factor calculated for methane Thermal conductivity geometry factor viscosity specific thermal capacity at constant volumes A 19 DD critical values Access Line Designation Value Unit Parameters of the actual gas from the current measurement of the gas quality The equations for calculating the K coefficient only achieve a sufficient degree of accuracy if the actual a conditions reach a much higher temperature and a much lower density than in this example A 20 DE Stoichiometry Access Line Designation Value Unit For pure methane the 7 2000 would display 1 1 D2 4 Rest 0 D8 16 043 Important for calculating the section DF Environment environmental impact following complete combustion A 21 DF Impact of environment in the case of complete combustion Access Line Designation Value Unit k Proportion of water calculated per CO2 per kWh Hs ko kWh CO2 emission calculated per kWh D 4 CO2perkWh Hi 0 2065 kg kWh D 5 CO2emissionsfe
194. ly displayed and recorded An alarm is tripped if there is no synchronous run and the device does not switch over to Vo For function 1 1 see item 10 8 ENCO with 2 channel HF Vm progress is calculated from Vo telegram contents The HF inputs are used only for checking synchronous run and for calculating the flow rate 1 out of 3 selection An alarm is tripped if there is no synchronous run and the device switches to the plausible input For function x y see item 11 but with warnings instead of alarms 9 2 channel HF x y with ENCO Vm progress and the flow rate are calculated from the HF inputs Vo is used only for checking synchronous run 1 out of 3 selection and is otherwise only displayed and recorded An alarm is tripped if there is no synchronous run and the device does not switch over to Vo For function x y see item 1 1 10 2 channel HF 1 1 The same number of pulses per time or per rotation of the turbine wheel on both channels The input pulses must be out of phase 90 to 270 The difference formation feature alternatively compares 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR measuring and reference pulses Every deviation is accumulated by the missing pulse counter An alarm is generated if the preset limit missing pulses e g 10 pulses is exceeded If the limit is not exceeded within a presettable period reference pulses e g 10 000 pulses the missing pulse counter is set to zero Vm progress and the flow rate
195. m 9000 upwards Transgas Register configuration for exchanging data with a bus coupler for Transgas Portugal EGT Register configuration for Eon Gas Transport Werne project The following applies for the operating mode of interfaces COM1 COM2 COM3 and The sending and receiving of characters can be checked using the Test setting After activation the interface name and parameters are sent to the interface periodically An entered or received character is returned in the form of an echo Example for COM3 The interface is configured as RS232 and connected to a PC A terminal program is used as a testing tool The 194 following is sent and displayed periodically C3 9600 8N 1 e g A 67 IC General DSfG Access Line Designation Value Unit IC 01 Corrector address DSfG address for the corrector entity All 30 DSfG slave addresses and the setting off are permitted here The corrector entity cannot be parameterized as a control station The corrector entity uses interface COM4 A prerequisite is that the DSfG interface card is installed in the ERZ2004 For DSfG the COM4 operating mode B 12 must then be set to DSfG In addition the bits parity stop bits B 77 must be set to 7E1 without fail The only values permitted for the baud rate setting are 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 The following applies for DSfG the lowest possible baud rate must be selected The special design of the DSfG protocol means that only a mini
196. mal effective increase in velocity is expected from 19200 baud upwards but the system load and susceptibility to failure increase drastically IC 02 CRC12 start value CRC12 start value also referred to as preset This value generates a custody transfer ID mark for the archive data The preset affects standard corrector queries as well as the archives of the internal recording function If O is selected as CRC 12 start value a custody transfer ID mark is not generated The data on the DSfG bus is then sent without CRC 12 If an external recording device is used to record standard corrector queries the CRC 12 start value entered here must be entered as the source CRC 12 IC 05 Last event Last event in the corrector entity The numerical code can be positive message comes or negative message goes The numerical value represents a message text The registration numbers 1 999 are manufacturer independent messages Manufacturer specific messages are assigned to all higher numbers The range 5000 5999 was reserved for the ERZ2000 and is also used See DSfG event documentation for the meaning The time stamp for the last event can be viewed under C 04 IC 14 Own bit string Central status display for DSfG BitO collective alarm bit1 malfunction Vb bit2 malfunction P or Rb bit3 malfunction T or Rn bit4 min warning lim Vb P T Rb or Rn bit5 min alarm lim Vb P T Rb or Rn bit6 max warn lim Vb P T Rb or Rn bit7 max
197. matically changes the billing mode in the case of a revision access is only possible on the Superuser level Under the operating code you can define in EC 22 whether in the case of an unplausible contact assignment see above a changeover has to be made to the special set of totalizers for an undefined direction 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 5 Programmable archive archive group 9 From software version 1 6 onwards it is possible to customize a special archive The contents and recording cycle can be chosen by the user For storing data the complete range of all useful measured values and results are available via a selection menu which is comparable to that of the current outputs The following time bases are selectable for the recording cycle Every minute 60 Every 3rd minute Every 6th minute Every 12th minute Every 15th minute Every hour Every day Gas day Every month Gas month Freeze Note the parameter set in the freeze cycle The archive depth is 4 096 entries You can parameterize the contents of this archive under OU User programmable archive In coordinate OU 1 Record cycle you can set the desired time base see above in a menu In coordinates OU 10 to OU 21 you can assign the 21 archive channels To access these coordinates it is sufficient to enter your user code 3 6 Determining the correction factors for calibrating the current inputs The current inputs for measuring the pressure temperature
198. me time 3 2 6 2 Overview of the most important parameters when switching over the volume corrector to an orifice plate flowcomputer 1 Under the Mode key EB base values Coordinate EB 19 Device type select the correct ERZ type The menu shows the following options ERZ 2004 ERZ 2104 ERZ 2002 ERZ 2102 ERZ 2004M ERZ 2104M ERZ 2002M ERZ 2102M ERZ 2000 C ERZ 2004 USC ERZ 2104 USC ERZ 2002 USC ERZ 2102 USC ERZ 2004M USC ERZ 2104M USC ERZ 2002M USC ERZ 2102M USC ERZ 2014 ERZ 2114 ERZ 2012 ERZ 2112 ERZ 2014M Select the desired type of orifice plate flowcomputer from this group ERZ 2114M ERZ 2012M ERZ 2112M 2 Under the Flow rates key Meter Coordinate GB 18 Volume transducer mode Set the Orifice parameter in the menu 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 Under the 1 Measured values key Overview of measured values Differential pressure Coordinate AP 10 Operating mode Set the number of differential pressure ranges and the appropriate operating mode 4 Under coordinates AP 12 to AP 55 Make further settings for differential pressure cells 5 The following example is for current input 4 If current input 4 is used for a differential pressure cell make sure that the measuring strategy in coordinate ND 09 is set at Differential pressure This activates the second AD converter and shortens the measurement If the is operated as transmitter set coordinate ND 13 Transducer 40 supply at ON If the cell is
199. messages which have not been acknowledged will be displayed If there are no more events the following text will appear No fault 7 3 Special DSfG features It is possible to redundantly assign two gas quality measuring devices e g two process gas chromatographs PGCs which are linked to the DSfG bus to the volume corrector If the two PGCs run without trouble the volume corrector always uses the main PGC in accordance with the DSfG rules If the main PGC is disturbed evaluation of the bit pattern the volume corrector will use the measured values of the reference PGC until the main PGC returns to untroubled operation When operation is switched over to the reference measuring device the ERZ 2000 can also adjust the procedure for calculating the K coefficient Example The main PGC supplies the complete analysis and the ERZ 2000 calculates with AGA 8 92 DC The reference measuring device e g correlative device only supplies the superior calorific value standard density and CO2 content When operation is switched over to the reference device the ERZ 2000 automatically switches its calculation mode from AGA 8 92 DC to 885 The relevant parameters can be found in the Import GC DSfG chapter 8 Characteristic data 8 1 8 1 1 Current measurement Analog inputs Range Resolution U max Ri Tc Measuring period Overvoltage protection Resistance measurement Type Range Resolution Accuracy Measuring period 8 1 2
200. mholtz sees 155 A 18 DG Transport PMEMOMIMA eren Rah 155 19 boxes ValUCS 156 20 DE 156 21 DF Impact of environment in the case of complete 157 A 22 DG Correction of velocity of sound essen enne nennen nennen nnns 157 A 23 DH Assessed ANALYSIS ence Pee p Leu aont e EXER Eee ERR Eee T 157 A 24 DI Adjustable extra base condition esses eene eene enne enne 158 A 25 DJ ExXha st summary nesrin pete ue IN ERE E Ra oe tenui 158 A 26 DK Composition of exhaust fumes enne nein nnne nnns 160 CONTENTS A 27 EB Base CIDIf 160 A 28 EG Billi MOJ E 161 A 29 ED Parameter ACCESS RE Eee RN ERE neus 162 A 30 DIS DAV oec oeste 163 A 31 EF Processing table valles 164 A 32 EH Module assembly uoto eet tope rero eret eee te Yeast lees users e ERE 164 A 33 alere 166 A 34 EJ Identification of Software 167 A 35 EK Identification of hardware nennen enne sent 168 A 36 Description Q 168 A 37 EM Erasing procedures
201. mmer time KAO03 Difference to UTC 7200 s 2 hours plus one hour during the summertime e Without daylight saving time KA13 Time zone ETC GMT 2 KAO9 Time zone name GMT 2 KAO03 Difference to UTC 7200 s 2 hours Visit www weltzeituhr com for more information Procedure for setting the time Butzbach my watch shows the correct local time The time zone KA73 on the corrector shows EUROPE BERLIN enter the time in the corrector as described The corrector now shows the correct local time in Germany The default country is Afghanistan change the time zone KA73 to ASIA KABUL The corrector now shows the correct local time in Afghanistan A 81 KB Time contact signal to external devices Access Line Designation Value Unit If the corrector generates a time signal the following options are available off every minute 213 every 30 seconds every hour every 30 minutes every day gas day every month every year amp as month e gas year The following must also be parameterized e Duration of time pulse KB02 e Assign contact output e Adjust polarity if necessary KB21 DSfG sync source If the setting on is selected the corrector generates an attention telegram Z for DSfG time synchronization A 82 KC External time signal Access Line Designation Value Unit 214 E 30 GPS time UTC 01 01 1970 00 00 00 Time telegram 60 Modb sync year
202. mputer The new application will be automatically unpacked and activated the next time the flow computer is restarted The initial booting up procedure of the flow computer will therefore take much longer than normal The flow computer will perform this restart automatically The null modem cable does not have to be disconnected immediately or the Hyperterminal program closed 2 5 Activating the device again after a software update Every software package contains an activation key which has to be communicated to the ERZ 2000 after a software update The device verifies the key together with the new check number of the UN software and the ERZ 2000 will not be ready for normal operation until it has yielded a positive result If the activation key is missing or is incorrect the ERZ 2000 switches to permanent operation under fault conditions and thus signals that there is no activation Corrector functions are performed normally but only the disturbance totalizers are running Example Together with the new software you also receive the new activation key which has to be entered as follows e Press 0 to select Mode and then press the Cursor Down key to browse to the Software ID chapter e Select the chapter with the Enter key and press the Cursor Down key until you reach the Activation function Here you can find the old activation key which is no longer valid for the new software e After you have opened the calibration lock press Enter ag
203. mputer bios e Connect COM F on the flow computer front side to the serial interface on your PC using the null modem cable e Start the HEXLoad program e Under Options Communication set the baud rate to 115200 and select the serial interface you are using on your PC e Open the calibration switch on the flow computer e Cold start the flow computer power off on The flow computer then registers itself in the target window on the HEXLoad program e Under File Open load the flow computer bios program file Bios files always have the file extension mot e g 1_009 mot e Then write the new program file to the flow computer using Target Auto e Disconnect the null modem cable from the flow computer and or close the HEXLoad program IMPORTANT e Close the calibration switch e The flow computer performs a cold start and then boots up with the new flow computer bios Updating the flow computer application e Connect COM F on the flow computer front side to the serial interface on your PC using the null modem cable e Start a terminal emulation program e g under Windows Start All Programs Accessories Communication Hyperterminal When starting for the first time establish a new connection with 115200 8 none 1 no handshake and save these settings e Switch the flow computer to superuser mode Enable ERZ superuser and user profile Close the calibration switch Key mode Cursor down to Access Enter code word 1 Enter
204. n 934184 MWh 35 Hour M fraction 476577 kg 36 Hour Vc fraction 294444 m3 D 2 Lasthour Vn 984 m3 D 3 Lasthour Vb 71238 m3 D 4 Last hour E 3058 MWh D 5 Lasthour 59491 kg D 6 Lasthour Vc 984 m3 a D 12 Last hour Vm frac 91667 m3 D 13 Last hour Vb frac 214957 m3 D 14 Last hour Efrac 384775 MWh EE D 15 Lasthour M frac 0 33627 kg D 16 Lasthour Vc frac 91667 m3 D 22 Hour Vm 28 m3 D 23 Hour Vb 2048 m3 D 24 HourE 87 MWh D 25 HourM 1710 kg D 26 Hour Vc 28 m3 D D D D D The quantities from the last hour LS02 LS16 are displayed on modbus registers 1400 1428 A 91 LT Daily quantities Access Line Designation Value Unit A 92 LU Quantity weighted average values Zugriff Zeile Name Wert Einheit Quantity weighted average values are generated for superior calorific value standard density and density The average values are calculated by division of hourly or daily quantities Division of energy quantity by volume at base conditions quantity Division of mass quantity by volume at base conditions quantity Division of mass quantity by volume at measurement conditions quantity Superior calorific value Standard density Density The quantity weighting depends on the method of quantity generation from current hourly quantities from quantities of the last hour from current daily quantities from daily quantities of the last day Example for a quantity weighted average val
205. n is shown GV 01 Current volumetric flow at measurement conditions GV 02 Current differential pressure GV 03 Current Reynolds number Re GV 04 Current diameter ratio beta GV 05 Current expansion factor epsilon GV 06 Current velocity of approach factor E GV 07 Current discharge coefficient C GV 08 Current flow coefficient alpha GV 09 Current pressure drop omega GV 10 Pressure tapping mode corner flange D D 2 GV 11 Calculation method ISO 5167 2003 ISO 5167 1995 ISO 5167 1998 ISO 5167 2000 GV 14 Number of iterations GV 15 Cycle quantity GV 16 Cycle time In the German version DIN EN ISO 5167 2004 The dimensions of the orifice plate are summarized under Meter in chapter GA Under GA 01 to GA 12 you can find the following data GA 01 Diameter of the orifice plate at the temperature at measurement conditions GA 02 Diameter of the pipe at the temperature at measurement conditions GA 03 Temperature correction factor of the orifice plate 04 Temperature correction factor of the pipe GA 05 Linear expansion coefficient of the orifice plate GA 06 Linear expansion coefficient of the pipe GA 07 Diameter of the orifice plate at 20 C GA 08 Diameter of the pipe at 20 C GA 10 Material of the orifice plate GA 11 Material of the pipe 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR Isentropic exponent If the isentropic exponent is to be used as a running measured value in flow rate calculation there a three calculat
206. nal X5 1 5 2 230 A 98 NI Resistance measurement 1 terminal X5 7 X5 8 X5 9 X5 10 231 A 99 NL Frequency input 1 X8 oder X9 231 A 100 NT Contact inputs terminal X7 8 232 ATO NU Current Input inde eerte tette eres edu seeds cae pecu tra peces 232 A 102 Resistance measurement 3 ceeeescesceeececcencceeeensceecessceesesescececesseceecesseeeseneeaees 233 A 103 OB Gauge pressure i e eee pre ERE REP ERR ERR e YER AER REPE GR ee YER Ree eu 233 A104 OD Input Val gs eorr re tee Here e en eoe enean e aene e eee ene 235 105 OE Miscellaneous ER Eee E 236 106 OF Extra analog value iiir rro err epa 237 A 107 Extra me SSages E 238 1087 OO Extra counter 1 X751 2 ice icc re pee a Ee eee eve eee eux Yea eee eet ts 239 A 109 OU Free programmable nnn etnies 240 A 110 Maximum load display maximum hourly value of the 241 A 111 Maximum load display maximum minute value of the 241 B TRUE NE 242 B 1 For devices with PTB
207. nd roughly This function can be accessed under Meter in chapter Namur sensor adjustment coordinates GU etc by simply pressing the 8 Flow rates key and the Cursor left key once 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 3 Special instructions and operating procedures 3 3 1 Linking extra counters with pulse output Example Extra counter 1 with pulse output 2 53 JL NT Contact input 1 X7 1 2 JL OO Extra counter 1 OO01 Input pulses x OO10 Evaluation OO08 Extra counters e g 10 JUUUUUUUUUL 10 pulses MG Pulse output 2 MG19 Transit extra counter 1 MG10 Measured value allocation Transit 0008 Extra counters MG13 Value MG01 Counters e g 2 JUUUUL 5 pulses There is no special operating mode for activating the extra counters They are supplied from the corresponding contact inputs and are active if an evaluation not equal to zero is parameterized and pulses arrive at the input 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 3 2 Linking check totalizers with pulse output Example Check totalizer 1 volume pulses with pulse output 2 JUL 54 1000 pulses NL Frequency input 1 X8 7 8 JUUT_ JUL 1000 pulses NL Check totalizer 1 NLO3 Input pulses x NL10 Check evaluation NLO8 Check totalizers e g 0 01 JUUUUUUUUUL 10 pulses MG Pulse output 2 MG19 Transit check totalizer 1 MG10 Measured value allocation Transit NLO8 Check totalizers
208. neral 80 2 5 With the ERZ 2000 81 5 2 1 EE CBE RE 81 5 2 2 Cross comparison 81 5 2 3 EPA Lise 82 SIT MEE nguoi m 83 9 2 5 Archive deptes 83 5 2 6 Archive idehtiflers 83 erg c 84 MEETS m UTR 84 6 2 Combined fault Messages RR OE 85 6 3 elogio Petr RR TER 89 5 4 Modbus bas Sos mer UN RET DDR NUS PE EN reS 90 6 5 Bon G s Transport iii qu dab ae bei Su 93 7 ALARMS AND WARNINGS ACKNOWLEDGING EVENTS 94 7 1 Functioning of alarms and warnings u eene n anon eonun n nean an nea E Kara enin nahen 94 7 2 Acknowledging evellls SERI YEN EaR SEEE SSES SS 94 7 9 Special DSfG tM I UE RE 94 8 CHARACTERISTIC DATA 95 8 1 Specifications of the 95 95 8 1 2 Frequency 95 8 1 3 GOWNS Inputs eo esed eee Ted 95 BVA 96 8 1 5 connection of t
209. ng a time zone All current valid time zones in the world are available amp moeERN E Enter Cancel The following syntax applies Per cent sign plus Minus sign minus Examples ETC GMT 1 signifies GMT 1 and is one hour more than UTC ETC GMT 1 signifies GMT 1 and is one hour less than UTC Options according to the ETC GMTx formula do not include daylight saving time e g ETC GMT 1 With all other options e g EUROPE BERLIN daylight saving time is activated automatically provided a legal provision exists for the time zone Examples for setting time zones and deactivating daylight saving time Germany e With daylight saving time KA13 Time zone Europe Berlin KAO0 Time zone name CET during normal time and CEST during the summer time KAO03 Difference to UTC 3600 s 1 hour plus one hour during the summertime e Without daylight saving time 212 KA13 Time zone ETC GMT 1 KAO9 Time zone name GMT 1 Difference to UTC 3600 1 hour Ireland e With daylight saving time KA13 Time zone EIRE KAO0 Time zone name GMT during normal time and ST during summer time Difference to UTC 0 s plus one hour during the summertime e Without daylight saving time KA13 Time zone ETC GMT KAO9 Time zone name GMT KAO0S Difference to UTC 0 s Israel e With daylight saving time KA13 Time zone ISRAEL KAO0 Time zone name IST during normal time and DT during su
210. nly relevant for the developer D 13 Sizeparemeter _ 0 105010 m3 kmol Define defaults for the distribution values not measured by the GC c components be added to ED ee A 14 Industrial gas parameter 153 Access Line Designation Value Unit Selection of technical gases or gas calculations using the Beattie ice Es serge 75H Coefficients for other gases configured directly in the CK 01 ES 7 Molmassothergas 0 kg kMol l E ES 9 Pootherges 580 15 CN C6 Distribution Access Line Designation Value Unit ES 1 coaistibution P Zl D 2 Weighthexane 000 _ ES 3 weigntheptane ES 4 Weightoctene 0 ee 0 ime ma AS 17 N2 8606 AS 18 CO 5 336 mole The calculation of the K coefficient is AS 19 H25 0 000 mole performed with these components H20 0 00 These are the values after the 10096 normalisation and after applying the the distribution rule Important for the A 16 DA Calculation in accordance with ISO 6976 Access Line Designation The ERZ 2000 can perform the ISO 6976 calculation because the components are known if the components are only available as input variables these can be used to calculate the fuel gas value standard density etc E Indication of the current conversion factors relating to country specific settings A 17 DB Calculation as per AGA 10 Helmho
211. nnen netten aser nate 187 A 60 GX Roughness of tube erre terrent ee ien ete esee avo 188 A 61 GY Abrasion of orifice edge eeesccsssssscessenscessnccceesensceeeesssccecesssncecesssscceeeseseeseenseeees 188 A 62 HB Energy TlOW T ate eere ro 189 A 63 HG Mass flow rate broken down into components sees 189 A 64 Ol ua 190 A 65 IA TCP IP Net WOTK Te n 191 A 66 IB SOM al 193 A 67 General D SIG ives B 194 A 68 12 9516 entity recording 195 69 IE Remoted data transmission access ccesesseeceeesnnceeessnneceeseaeeeceeaecceseeeceeeeaeeeeeesaes 196 A 70 199 71 IG Imported gas quality via DSfG esses 201 A 72 IH Imported gas quality via enne 203 A 73 Il MODUS SUPEMDIOCK qe RR 205 CONTENTS A 74 Imported main gas quality via modbus cessere enne 206 A 75 Meier 208 A 76 IM GC6000 Response 209 A 77 IN GC6000 Gas cylinder and control panel eese 209 A 78 2 2
212. ns In the ERZ 2000 there is a total of approx 600 possible fault messages Vm Vb T Gas Diff qual p Register 474 Bit 15 Bit 0 86 6 MODBUS Table of faults affecting register 474 Running Fault No category 0A 00 0 1A 00 1 2A 00 2 3A 00 3 7A 01 0 8A 01 1 9A 01 2 10A 01 3 14 02 0 15 02 1 16 02 2 17 02 3 21 03 0 22 03 1 23 03 2 24 03 3 28 04 0 29 04 1 30A 04 2 31A 04 3 35 04 7 38 05 0 39 A 05 1 40 A 05 2 41A 05 3 44 05 6 46 05 8 48 06 0 49 06 1 50 A 06 2 51 A 06 3 55 A 07 0 56 A 07 1 57 A 07 2 58 A 07 3 62 A 08 0 63 A 08 1 64 08 2 65 A 08 3 69 A 09 0 70 A 09 1 71A 09 2 72 09 3 80 12 0 Fault number Short text T loss T lt l alarm lim T gt up alarm lim T jump TS loss TS lt l alarm lim TS gt up alarm lim TS jump TD loss TD l alarm lim TD gt up alarm lim TD jump Pa loss Pa l alarm lim Pa gt up alarm lim Pa jump sd loss sd lt l alarm lim sd gt up alarm lim sd jump HW pulse comp R loss R l alarm lim R up alarm lim R jump R comp error Vo alarm Hs loss Hs lt l alarm lim Hs gt up alarm lim Hs jump CO2 loss CO2 l alarm lim CO2 gt up alarm lim CO2 jump VSM loss VSM lt l alarm lim VSM gt up alarm lim VSM jump H2 loss H2 l alarm lim H2 gt up alarm lim H2 jump VSB loss Long text Loss of temperature Temperature below lower alarm limit Tempera
213. o be a user of the bus COMA B 12 COM4 operating mode DSfG hd has to be used and the DSfG mode is to be chosen 81 21 5 operating mode Modem wi If the ERZ 2000 as an RDT unit is to form a new DSfG station access point an external modem is to be connected to COM5 and the Modem mode is to be chosen 5 2 2 Cross comparison via DSfG Operating volumes standard volumes temperature and pressure of two correctors should be compared via DSfG A partner device B and A is assigned alternately to a converter pair for example with the addresses A and B The parameters are configured via C 01 Corrector address and O 10 Partner address Any corrector whose own address is smaller than the address of the partner adopts the role of master during data exchanges The slave is passive in this situation The master generates a data transmission telegram with DFO Y i e reply expected in line with a time event that can be adjusted with O 77 Test cycle The data section contains the values for Vb Vn T and P as well as the determination period Vb and Vn are autonomous meters that operate independently of fault and billing mode After a telegram is sent the meters are reset to zero before they continue incrementing Vb divided by time has the same meaning as a Ob flow The slave does not react to a time event even if it is parameterized It always replies when it receives a data transmission telegram with DFO Y rather than
214. odeword Access Then the following text appears The rhombus indicates that code entry has been enabled The four asterisks stand for the first part of the 8 character code After you have pressed Enter the display will turn a bit darker and the four asterisks will disappear Now you have to enter the first four characters of the code correctly in the Access Codeword 1 third line Press Enter to terminate your inputs and use the Cursor Down key to browse to codeword 2 Now press Enter again to switch over the display to input mode darker and enter the second part of the codeword If the code has been entered correctly the Power LED at the top left of the front panel will start to flash 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 3 Setting the device type If the device is not used for custody transfer applications for this purpose specific settings have to be made in the factory the ERZ 2000 which exists in the following variants e PTZ corrector ERZ 2004 e PTZ corrector with mass totalizer ERZ 2004M e superior calorific value corrector ERZ 2104 e superior calorific value corrector with mass totalizer ERZ 2104M e density corrector ERZ 2002 e density corrector with mass totalizer ERZ 2002M e density corrector energy ERZ 2102 e density corrector energy with mass totalizer ERZ 2102M e PTZ corrector ERZ 2004 USC e superior calorific value corrector ERZ 2104 USC e density corrector ERZ 2002 USC e dens
215. olumns and vertically from 1 to 99 lines AA AB BA m e es Ss e NA NB 01 02 98 99 A 1 AB Absolute Pressure Access Line Designation Value Unit AS 1 Measured value 79 997 bar 79 997 bar The 4 20mA coefficient setting does not cause the calibrated range to automatically define the alarm limits but instead selects coefficient O for the 4 mA value and coefficient 1 for the 20 mA value The alarm limits can then be adjusted freely and have no influence on the mapping of the current input The following pressure units are available bar kp cm2 psi MPa atm kPa torr bara Pa hPa Selection field for assigning the source i e where the signal is connected See next page for explanations The correction value causes an offset shift which is calculated from Reference value minus display value D Base value 79 997 Bar entered directly in the unit of D 25 Mean for DSfG 79 997 Bar pressure D 27 Current status Fixed value Example value read on reference D 28 DSfG status Fixed value device 20 00 bar D Used range 0 000 Bar value displayed on ERZ 20 02 bar which produces 0 2 bar Somma o O Ra Enter this value in field 17 with the D Min drag indicator 79 997 Bar correct prefix D 32 Max drag indicator 79 997 Bar D 33 Current gradient 0 000 bar s D 34 Second mean 79 997 Bar
216. omp calculation calculation use Vo Alarm OFF OFF OFF Metering Vo Vo Vo LF 1 chan Alarm OFF OFF Vo LF 1 chan Metering Vo Vo LF 1 Vo Warning _ OFF OFF LF 1 chan Vo Metering LF Meas channel Vo HF 1chan Alarm OFF OFF Vo HF 1chan HF signal Vo Vo HF 1 chan Vo Warning OFF OFF HF 1 chan Vo HF signal HF signal Meas channel Vo HF2 chan 1 1 Alarm OFF 1 1 Vo HF meas HF meas signal Vo Vo HF2 chan 1 1 Vo Warning OFF 1 1 meas Vo HF meas signal HF meas signal Meas channel Vo HF2 chan X Y Alarm OFF X Y Vo HF meas HF meas signal Vo Vo HF2 chan X Y Vo Warning OFF X Y HF meas Vo HF meas signal HF meas signal Meas channel HF2 chan 1 1 OFF OFF 1 1 Meas Comp HF meas signal HF meas signal Meas channel HF2 chan X Y OFF OFF XY Meas Comp HF meas signal HF meas signal Meas channel HF LF OFF OFF OFF HF LF HF signal HF meas signal Meas channel HF 1 chan OFF OFF OFF OFF HF signal HF signal Meas channel LF 1 chan OFF OFF OFF OFF Metering LF signal Meas channel DZU OFF Alarm OFF OFF DZU DZU DZU IGM OFF OFF OFF OFF IGM IGM IGM 31 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR Explanation of the operating modes 1 Only ENCO no NAMUR inputs Vm progress has to be calculated from Vo telegram contents No calculation of the flow rate 2 ENCO with LF Vm progress is calculated from Vo telegram contents The LF input is used only fo
217. on of clicking Edit to access another menu and select a 226 suitable variable for the current output from all the variables and measured values available Line 3 Smoothed orig value NEN Active smoothing generates intermediate values which are viewed as real measured values by a downstream device that digitalizes more quickly than the corrector In order to control and monitor this effect and any adverse repercussions the physical measured value is recalculated from the smooth output current and then displayed Line 9 Averaging factor Determines the degree of current smoothing 0 Smoothing deactivated 1 Infinite smoothing Value range 0 0 99999 Line 17 Method Slow Output method for plotters or displays The output current is renewed after each complete second and then maintained for one second Digital stages are assigned to the output current Fast Output method for regulation The output current is calculated every time the physical output value is recalculated The recalculation frequency can be viewed under Cycles The output current follows the physical output value for the correction speed directly The value is retained until a new output value is available Digital stages are assigned to the output current Linear sweep Special output method that can be used if a downstream controller reacts over sensitively to digital stages but can operate with a constant dead time of one second A new current output v
218. only used for comparison 9 HF2 chan X Y Vo Vm is calculated from the input signal Vo is only used for comparison 10 LF1 chan 1 channel operation with LF input only metering no flow rate 11 HF t chan 1 channel operation with HF input 12 HF2 chan 1 1 2 channel operation with HF inputs of the same value 13 HF2 chan X Y 2 channel operation with HF inputs of different value 14 HF LF 2 channel operation with HF input meas and LF input comp 15 DZU Vm is supplied via DZU protocol 16 IGM Activates the integrated ultrasonic controller sensor data are supplied by the ultrasonic measuring head 17 Orifice An orifice plate is used to calculate the volume for ERZ 2014 2114 2012 2112 18 4 20 mA Processing an analog signal which is proportional to the flow rate A current input has to be selected as source under AO Flow 4 20mA ENCO ENCODER Electronic totalizer with digital interface 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 7 4 Gas quality data The data of the measuring device used e g gas chromatograph have to be communicated to the corrector as transmitter data Apart from the parameters for measurement the type manufacturer serial number etc have also to be entered in the relevant column of the measured value concerned e g Superior calorific value Then these data appear automatically in the ID display This also applies to the other values such as Standard density and CO2 where the ID data have to be entered re
219. onnection Terminal 4 Current input 5 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Terminal 5 Current input 6 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Terminal 6 Current input 6 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Terminal 7 Current input 7 Note Polarity vs 1 to 6 reversed or spare PT 100 Terminal 8 Current input 7 Note Polarity vs 1 to 6 reversed or spare PT 100 Terminal 9 Current input 8 Note Polarity vs 1 to 6 reversed or spare PT 100 Terminal 1 Current input 8 Note Polarity vs 1 to 6 reversed or spare PT 100 You can determine the setting i e either spare PT 100 or current input 7 or 8 via hardware coding jumper The setting made in the factory is current input 7 or 8 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS X7 Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal 1 2 3 4 Terminal 5 Terminal 6 Terminal 7 Terminal 8 Terminal 9 1 Terminal X8 Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal 1 2 3 4 Terminal 5 6 7 8 Terminal 9 1 Terminal Signal input 1 to be assigned via software Signal input 1 to be assigned via software Signal input 2 to be assigned via software Signal input 2 to be assigned via software Signal input 3 to be assigned via software Signal input 3 to be assigned via software Signal input 4 to be assigned via software Signal input 4 to be a
220. or the ERZ2000 to operate with the modem Meaning of the default value at Hayes command prefix precedes every command e0 ECHO OFF the modem does not repeat the received characters 0 1 Automatic call acceptance after one ring IE 07 Dial prefix Command for dialing a prefix Refer to the documentation accompanying the modem for information on the meaning of the commands Minimum required information that must be obtained Is pulse dialing required ATDP command Is tone dialing required ATDT command Is there a dialing tone immediately Are you at a private branch exchange Dialing tone interpretation must be deactivated See also ATX command How do you access an outside line from a private branch exchange e g dial zero first Frequently used dialing commands atx3dp Pulse dialing command without identification of the dialing tone atx3dt Tone dialing command without identification of the dialing tone atx3dtO Tone dialing command without identification of the dialing tone With access to an outside line by dialing zero IE 10 Time RDT param If an RDT parameter is modified at the central exchange during the command phase phase 3 of the login procedure a time stamp is recorded here IE 13 Carrier message Governs the activity of the message Carrier signal modem If the message is considered an unwanted interruption it can be deactivated here IE 14 PTB message Governs the activity of the message PTB
221. ore signal from the superior calorific value transmitter No more signal from standard density transmitter No more signal from relative density transmitter No more signal from CO2 transmitter No more signal from N2 transmitter No more signal from H2 transmitter GC reports loss of superior calorific value GC reports loss of standard density GC reports loss of relative density GC reports loss of carbon dioxide GC reports loss of nitrogen GC reports loss of hydrogen Beattie amp Bridgeman iteration is running amok Loss of methane Methane below lower alarm limit Methane exceeds upper alarm limit Methane gradient exceeds maximum Methane below lower warning limit Methane exceeds upper warning limit N N NNN NN NY NY NNN H NNN YN NY N N N NN NNN NN NY YM No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 113 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 592 H 98 6 CH4 param error Inconsistent parameterization methane 1 No 593 A 98 7 Comp normaliz Error occurred during normalization of gas components 2 Yes 594 A 98 8 Inval act key Invalid activation key 2 No 595 H 99 1 TCP after boot Changed TCP configuration restart is necessary 1 No 596 A 99 2 CH4 GC timeout No more signal from methane transmitter 2 Yes 597 A 99 3 CH4 GC al
222. ower mapping limit AP 27 dp 2 at 20 mA upper mapping limit AP 28 dp 2 correction offset correction Measured values and parameters for cell 3 AP 29 cell 3 differential pressure AP 30 cell 3 input AP 31 act dp 3 offset AP 32 cell 3 source with menu for assignment to the relevant current input AP 33 dp 3 at 4 mA lower mapping limit AP 34 dp 3 at 20 mA upper mapping limit AP 35 dp 3 correction offset correction AP 36 to AP 49 Information about mean values DSfG values etc identical to other inputs such as pressure or temperature at measurement conditions AP 50 Display of the current differential pressure measured via the HART input digital value AP 51 Display of the difference between the digital and analog measured values 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR AP 52 Display of the calculated correction related to the HART measured value online correction AP 53 Parameter for inputting the permissible correction related to the HART measured value AP 54 to AP 58 data plate information about the sensors AP 61 to AP 68 Freeze values 38 b In order to optimally operate the ERZ 2000 as an orifice plate flowcomputer the second A D converter available in the device is to be activated to enable fast differential pressure measurements to be taken in parallel with measurements of pressure and temperature To do this change over to the Current input chapter of the channel selected and set the Measuring s
223. parameterization error Rn calibration time exceeded Rn input signal fault calibration unit Rn correction value out of permitted range Hs calibration time exceeded Hs input signal fault calibration unit Hs correction value formation out of permitted range Module 1A assembly inplausible Module 1B assembly inplausible Module 2A assembly inplausible Module 2B assembly inplausible Module 3A assembly inplausible Module 3B assembly inplausible delta P cell 1 current lower 3 mA delta P cell 2 current lower 3 mA delta P cell 3 current lower 3 mA illegal diameter ratio throat pipe delta P cell 1 failure delta P cell 2 failure NO NO NY NY NH NH NY NO MN on on MN RN MN M Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No 109 110 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 I IL I gt gt EX gt gt gt gt gt 77 6 77 7 77 8 77 9 78 0 78 1 78 2 78 3 78 4 78 5 78 6
224. peatedly In the case of AGA 8 92 DC this applies to all components as well 20 Example for data entry Press 1 Meas P T and locate the arrow gt on Hs Press Enter and then the Cursor Down key to access Ln the functions coordinates and enter the relevant data There are different ways of measuring and transmitting the gas quality data superior calorific value and standard density and the individual components In Germany the standard is transmission via the DSfG interface There are the following operating modes for the superior calorific value for example OFF No measurement input is switched off Default Fixed value no measurement DSfG Data are supplied by one gas quality meter per interface RMG bus Data are supplied by one gas quality meter per interface Linear frequency response Frequency input Polynomial 1st order Coefficient O defines the polynomial Polynomial 2nd order Coefficients 0 and 1 define the polynomial Polynomial 3rd order Coefficients 0 1 and 2 define the polynomial 0 20mA limit The min and max limits define the assignment of mA to the superior calorific value 4 20 mA limit The min and max limits define the assignment of mA to the superior calorific value 0 20mA coefficient Coefficient O defines the min range coefficient 1 defines the max range 4 20 mA coefficient Coefficient O defines the min range coefficient 1 defines the max range Tabular value The super
225. perm N M Hs correction value formation out of permitted 2 Yes 540 H 93 2 Rncorr gt perm N e Rn correction value formation out of permitted Ves 541 H 93 3 Function test A function test is running at the moment 2 No 542 H 93 4 USZ implaus USZ transmitter implausible protocol data 2 No 543 A 93 5 USZ alarm USZ transmitter signalizes an alarm 2 No 544 A 93 6 USZ timeout No more signal from USZ transmitter 2 No 545 W 93 7 Vo1 implaus USZ totalizer for Vo1 shows implausible behaviour 1 No 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 gt gt gt gt gt gt cU uu qv vU Uo 22 gt gt DISZ gt gt 22 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 93 8 93 9 94 0 94 1 94 2 94 3 94 4 94 5 94 6 94 7 95 0 95 1 95 2 95 3 95 4 95 5 95 6 95 7 95 8 95 9 96 0 96 1 96 2 96 3 96 4 96 5 96 6 96 7 96 8 96 9 97 0 97 1 97 2 97 3 97 4 97 5 97 6 97 7 97 8 97 9 98 0 98 1 98 2 98 3 98 4 98 5 Vo2 implaus Vo1D implaus Vo2D implaus Time sync para I9 failure 110 failure 111 failure 112 failure PT3 failure PTA failure Math problem Corrupt code Alarm volume Warning volume Time syn
226. ples for SV 140 1 00000 Calculated values From the data sheet for the meter e g TRZ RMG Messtechnik specifications Wind data calculated from the gas flow velocity only out of interest Separately adjustable start up and slow down times for monitoring the operating time under Qmin Parameters for operation with an ultrasound gas meter 10 VOS upper limit 150 00000 m s CIEL 7 o o o o D gt gt A 2 6951 645 Sn es WN 3 000 sub uat Lob Ht SS EOM 59 ESSI 4 35 Show VOS error no n ae B A 55 Reynolds correction Access Line Designation Value Unit Correction procedure when using an ultrasound gas meter al vs LT 186 A 56 GN Base correction Access Line Designation Value Unit A 57 GO Err Curve correction Access Line Designation Value Unit A 58 GP Effects of correct Indication of the effect of corrections under GM GN and GO Access Line Designation Value Unit A 59 Namur Sensor adjustment Access Line Designation _ Value Unit New menu with introduction of Ex isolating device for NAMUR signals from HF LF sensors or ENCO and pressure and temperature sensors A 60 Roughness of tube Access Line Designation Value Unit If the on setting is selected the roughness of the internal
227. pressure is higher the alarm Flow in closed pipe is activated The calibration lock has to be open in order to perform the offset correction The correction can only be perfomed manually Example Under Meter in the GH Start up slow down chapter next to the maximum valve time start up slow down in coordinate GH 07 select the source which informs the ERZ when the flow rate has to be zero The menu shows the following options OFF No function Contact inputs 1 to 8 One of the 8 contact inputs supplies the information Modbus A Modbus register register 9201 supplies the information 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR In coordinate GH 06 Meter run the current status open closed is shown In coordinate GH 08 Modbus pipe state the contents of the Modbus register 9201 status open closed is shown In coordinate GH 09 Definition Pipe Wrk you can select whether the status of the flow in closed pipe is to be signalized as an alarm or a warning In this example contact input 5 is to supply the information If all the conditions for zero flow are fulfilled and there is a minor differential pressure left select chapter AP 39 Differential pressure to activate the zero point adjustment Coordinate AP 33 Actual dp1 offset shows the differential pressure caused by the zero drift Correction can only be made by pressing Enter on the front panel provided that the calibration lock is open and coordinate AP 33 is displayed at the sa
228. quantities occurred discard Use the creeping quantities occurred and add them to normal quantities accumulate Volume frequency source Display of the connected or active input Channel Qm determination Some functions It is shown whether Om flow rate is formed from the measuring channel or the and reference channel parameters described here are visible only Channel Vm determination at the Service It is shown from which channel Vm is calculated measuring channel reference or Developer level channel Vo 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR Hardware pulse comparison It is shown whether the hardware comparison is active Vo effect of fault It is shown whether Vo protocol errors are signalled as alarm or warning or whether Some f nctions they are not signalled This depends on the selected operating mode and parameters described here 30 Reference quality are visible only It is shown how the corrector calculated the quality of the reference channel during at the Service or Developer level software comparison The result is calculated from the permanent monitoring of measuring and reference channels Maximum allowable deviation X Y Here you can set the maximum allowable deviation between the measuring and reference channels The factory setting is 476 Main blades X Display integer ratio of Kv measuring channel to Kv reference channel projected to approx 200 pulses T
229. quantity exist for the selected transmitter 2 GETTING STARTED OPERATION 2 7 3 Gas meter volume data logging orifice plate The data of the gas meter used have to be communicated to the corrector as transmitter data Apart from the parameters for measurement the type manufacturer serial number etc have to be entered in the Meter chapter as well Then these data appear automatically in the ID display Example for data entry Press 9 Meter The arrow is located on Flow rate parameters Press Enter and then the Cursor Down key to access the relevant values and enter the data The Volume transmitter mode function in the Flow rate parameters chapter defines the operating mode for E calculating the volume at measurement conditions The following operating modes are available 1 Vo Vm is calculated from Vo ENCO 1 totalizer provides data via protocol 2 Vo LF1 chan Vm is calculated from Vo LF input is used for comparison 3 Vo HF1 chan Vm is calculated from Vo HF input is used for comparison 4 Vo HF2 chan 1 1 Vm is calculated from Vo HF inputs are used for comparison p 5 Vo HF2 chan X Y Vm is calculated from Vo HF inputs are used for comparison 6 1 1 Vo Vm is calculated from the input signal Vo is only used for comparison 7 HF1 chan Vo Vm is calculated from the input signal Vo is only used for comparison 8 HF2 chan 1 1 Vo Vm is calculated from the input signal Vo is
230. r checking synchronous run An alarm is tripped if there is no synchronous run A flow rate is determined with 32 reduced accuracy from the LF signal 3 LF with ENCO Vm progress is calculated from the LF volume input Vo is used only for checking synchronous run and is otherwise only displayed and recorded An alarm is tripped if there is no synchronous run and the device will not switch to Vo A flow rate is determined with reduced accuracy from the LF signal 4 ENCO with HF Vm progress is calculated from Vo telegram contents The HF measuring input is used only for checking synchronous run and for calculating the flow rate An alarm is tripped if there is no synchronous run 5 HF with ENCO Vm progress and flow rate are calculated from the HF measuring channel Vo is used for checking synchronous run and is otherwise only displayed and recorded An alarm is tripped if there is no synchronous run 6 ENCO with 2 channel HF 1 1 Vm progress is calculated from Vo telegram contents The HF inputs are used only for checking synchronous run and for calculating the flow rate 1 out of 3 selection An alarm is tripped if there is no synchronous run and the device switches to the plausible input For function 1 1 see item 10 but with warnings instead of alarms 7 2 channel HF 1 1 with ENCO Vm progress and the flow rate are calculated from the HF inputs Vo is used only for checking synchronous run 1 out of 3 selection and is otherwise on
231. r of type VOS 07 Subrack with ERZ 2000 Freely assignable explosion protected VOS 07 to connectors X8 amplifier frequency transmitter and X9 Freely assignable to connectors X5 PT 100 and X6 3 wire connection 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 11 2 5 6 Input for standard density superior calorific value correction Set of switches ERZ 2000 Freely assignable to connectors X7 and X8 Rhon corr Hs corr Rhon M H Hs M H 11 2 5 7 Input for volume measurements Vortex gas meter ERZ 2000 Connector Connector Connector Connecting WBZ 08 X8 WA1 W1 box 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Turbine meter ERZ 2000 Connector Connector Connector Connector TRZ 03 X8 TA1 T1 valid for 3 pin connectors 129 for all others pin 6 Ref Turbine meter with built in NAMUR isolating device option ERZ 2000 Connector Connector TRZ 03 x9 r I I I PE a valid for 3 pin connectors i for all others pin 6 I hj Ref HFY Ultrasonic flowmeter DB 9 connector X 11 Com 1 Connecting box ERZ 2000 Ultrasonic meter DB 9 adapter with terminating resistor 11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS The following pictures show the USE 09 electronics of the ultrasonic flowmeter 130 Jumpers for RS485 0 007 nnn service interface terminating resistor ON 227 TupsFKl m 4x8 4 o B Ree D xU mmm xd T 3485 0 L l DIL switch for RS
232. r pin assignments esee 133 11 3 2 DSfG bus terminatio TEES 133 136 Coordinate E 136 A ABAbsolute PressUEe siccis iet endete RYE NE conse S EEE EEEE EO KHEN ER deo 137 A2 AC Gas ui ciii 138 AD Superior calorific valUe eerte 139 4 AE Standard density enses eua noa eo Po ine ues PRETI E eae EET Yee 141 A 5 AF Relative 142 DUMP E ERER 144 7 AL Inside temperature of device 145 A B Components mode cceesscsssesscecesncccecenscceesenscceessssceeessssececesssaceeeessacesesseeeeseeeeseees 146 9 BB m 146 A 10 CC Calculation of esses essen eee nennen nennen 148 A 11 GD GERG equation Of State 151 A 12 CE Zustandsgleichung AGA 19 enne 152 A 13 CH 8 92DC equation of state nennen nennen eene nnn noe 152 A 14 CK Industrial gas eene nor ee nna esto resin uarie 153 A 15 CN C6 DIStHIDUTION EE 153 A 16 DA Calculation in accordance with ISO 6976 ou eecsscecesssneceesseeeeesnaeceeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeaes 154 A 17 DB Calculation as per 10 Hel
233. rding to the German design pipeline quality gas as per ISO 12213 3 T from 10 to 65 C P from 0 to 120 bar dv from 0 55 to 0 8 Ho from 30 to 45 CO2 from 0 to 20 Mol H2 from 0 to 10 Mol According to wider ranges of application as per ISO 12213 3 T from 10 to 65 C P from to 120 bar dv from 0 55 to 0 9 Ho from 20 to 48 CO2 from 0 to 30 Mol H2 from 0 to 10 Mol Indication of the deviation relating to the calculation method selected for the correction AGA 8 92 DC in this Default after limit value violation Use the default value for the K coefficient if the limit value is exceeded Calculation after limit value violation Continue calculation if the limit value Internal intermediate values from the extremely wide According to internal RMG specification T from 15 to 70 C P from to 150 bar dv from 0 38 to 1 16 Ho from 10 to 60 MJ m CO2 from 0 to 30 Mol H2 from 0 to 30 Mol 152 Sensor limits without restriction the normal sensor limits apply when these limits are violated A 12 Zustandsgleichung AGA NX 19 Access Line Designation Value Unit CE08 Yes Calculation of the K coefficient acc to AGANX19 is possible for natural gas with high nitrogen content with 70 mol of N2 A 13 CH AGA 8 92DC equation of state Access Line Designation Value Unit Deviation in relation to itself equals one of course Internal equation parameter o
234. rectly again If the system switches to the comparator measuring device the ERZ 2000 can also adapt the method for calculating the K coefficient Example Main PGC delivers full analysis and the ERZ 2000 calculates with AGA 8 92 DC The comparator measuring device e g correlative only delivers the fuel gas value standard density and CO2 If the system switches to the comparator device the ERZ 2000 automatically switches the calculation method from AGA 8 92 DC to GERG 888 The relevant parameters can be found on the ERZ 2000 under the coordinates IG Import GC DSfG A 72 IH Imported gas quality RMG bus Access Line Designation i The GC 6000 mode will be ie 1 p active if an expansion module has been fitted and configured Otherwise RMG bus will be assumed and displayed Protocol select Interpretation options default value of the corrector live value of the GC retained value of the GC Fields H 03 to JH 16 show the usable gas quality data To use them for correction select the RMG bus mode for the relevant measured value inputs 204 25 RMG bus monitoring 300 L 27 Cumentstte waid o D 29 Int 3 n Undefined definitions Assigning the corrector to a stream 1 to 4 Setting Without indication means that no stream is assigned In GC6000 mode only stream 1 can be used at the moment After MAINS ON with setting Start with
235. reference channel and no monitoring for synchronous run Each pulse received is counted and there is no lower cut off limit creeping quantity DZU Connection of a US 9000 ultrasonic arithmetic processing unit with main totalizer function transmission of totalizer readings and flow rates with the DZU protocol For information about this protocol see LO coordinate DZU protocol or Digital totalizer transmission For further information see FH Ultrasonic flowmeter diagnosis IGM Direct connection to the sensors of the ultrasonic gas meter IGM integration of the US 9000 arithmetic processing unit formation of totalizer readings from sensor data This is only applicable in conjunction with the ERZ 2xxx USC variants Orifice plate Connection to differential pressure sensors up to 3 cascaded sensors are possible The overlapping areas are monitored when ramping up or down To be used in conjunction with the ERZ 2014 ERZ 2012 ERZ 2114 and ERZ 2112 device types 4 20 mA Connection of an analog flow rate transmitter with proportional function Contrary to the orifice plate there is no root extraction and no grading the 4 20 mA signal covers the complete range The assignment is made as follows 4 mA 0 m3 h 20 mA Qm max this is the value under GB Flow rate parameters 33 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 2 5 Information about operating the device as 7 2000 USC In this operating mode the sensor s
236. riority 99 8 CHARACTERISTIC DATA 8 1 9 Specifications of the embedded PC MOD520C Microcontroller AMD Elan SC520 with 586 CPU Integrated FPU Floating Point Unit Power supply 2 5 V 3 3 V and 5 V CPU clock 133 MHz 2 PCI controller 32 bits SDRAM controller for up to 256 Mbytes max 64 Mbytes on board GP general purpose bus ROM flash controller for 16 Mbytes 32 1 0 ports 256 bytes EEPROM for BIOS DMA controller 2 x UARTs for serial interfaces 2 x CAN ports Fast Ethernet controller for 10 100Mbps RTC real time clock 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 9 Fault numbers Running No 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Fault category A gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt I Fault number 00 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 4 00 5 00 9 01 0 01 1 01 2 01 3 01 4 01 5 01 9 02 0 02 1 02 2 02 3 02 4 02 5 02 9 03 0 03 1 03 2 03 3 03 4 03 5 03 9 04 0 04 1 04 2 04 3 04 4 04 5 04 6 04 7 04 8 Short text Tloss T lt l alarm lim T gt up alarm lim T jump T I warn lim T gt up warn lim T param error TS loss TS I alarm lim TS gt up alarm lim TS jump TS I warn lim TS gt up warn lim TS param error TD loss TD lt l alarm lim TD
237. rminate the correction program and activate the interface 61 3 7 2 Rear panel COM 1 to COM 5 COM 1 interface Switchable from RS 232 to RS 422 or RS 485 different protocols can be used optionally the MODBUS protocol and IGM for connection to an ultrasonic flowmeter are available Optionally MODBUS ASCII RTU can be offered as standard Modbus drivers for RS 232 or RS 485 interfaces OFF Test Modbus RTU Modbus ASCII IGM USE09 RMG bus master DZU Flowsick If an ultrasonic FlowSick meter is connected the COM 1 mode has to be set at Flowsick and the Modbus device address is to be set under IB 25 E 8 25 Address FLOWSIC 1 COM 2 interface RS 232 is not switchable the DZU protocol is used connection to US 9000 main totalizer for the ultrasonic flowmeter OFF Test DZU Modbus RTU Modbus ASCII GPS 170 RMG View 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR COM 3 interface Switchable from RS 232 with handshake to RS 485 conforming to the DSfG interface A second Modbus protocol or the DSfG master can be assigned The DSfG interface implemented in the ERZ 2000 complies with the current version of the DSfG technical specification for volume correctors Within the scope of this documentation we assume that the DSfG interface is known Further documentation can be obtained from the DVGW Second Modbus interface parameters as with COM 1 OFF 62 Test DSfG master Modbus RTU Modbus ASCII R
238. rol signals Other ERZ 2000 or ERZ 9000T correctors 4 2 Coordinates The GC 6000 mode will be active if an expansion module has been fitted and configured Otherwise RMG bus will be assumed and displayed IH Gas quality imported via GC6000 or RMG bus gt o o o o r 3 Designation Value 8 E o 70 Interpretation options e default value of the corrector e live value of the GC e retained value of the GC Fields H 03 to IH 16 show the usable gas quality data To use them for correction select the RMG bus mode for the relevant measured value inputs Assigning the corrector to a stream 1 to 4 Setting Without indication means that no stream is assigned In GC6000 mode only stream 1 can be used at the moment After MAINS ON with setting Start with fault an alarm will be generated in the calibration phase It will disappear as soon as there are valid gas quality data available oa B 25 bus monitoring 60 s N E gt e co E e 27 Current state Invalid Options for original values e analyzing run Current status okey e calibration gas D 29 Interpretation undefined e control gas 30 GC tg Hs 0 000 kWh m3 e flushing e retained value 31 GC tg Rn 0 0000 kg m3 e start up value 32 GC tg rd 0 0000 e undefined e bus tel
239. s Yes Yes No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 82 3 82 4 82 5 82 6 82 7 82 8 82 9 83 0 83 1 83 2 83 3 83 4 83 5 83 6 83 7 84 0 84 1 84 2 84 3 84 4 84 5 84 6 85 0 85 1 85 2 85 3 85 4 85 5 85 6 85 7 86 0 86 1 86 2 86 3 86 4 86 5 86 6 86 7 87 0 87 1 87 2 87 3 87 4 87 5 87 6 87 7 88 0 Path 5 communic Path 6 communic Path 7 communic Path 8 communic Path 1 VOS Path 2 VOS Path 3 VOS Path 4 VOS Path 5 VOS Path 6 VOS Path 7 VOS Path 8 VOS GOM uncomplete HFX miss pulses HFY miss pulses Kpp loss Kpp lt l alarm lim Kpp gt up alarm lim Kpp lt l warn lim Kpp gt up warn lim Kpp param error Kpp jump msg1 msg2 msg3 msg4 msg5 msg msg7 msg8 1158 1 11522 msg3 msg4 msg5 msg msg7 msg8 msg1 msg2 msg3 msg4 msg5 msg msg7 msg8 param ignored Path 5 communication quality less as demanded Path 6 communication quality less as demanded Path 7 communication quality less as demanded Path 8 communication quality less as demanded Path 1 VOS implausible Path 2 VOS implausible Path 3 VOS implausible Path 4 VOS implausible Path 5 VOS implausible Path 6 VOS implausible
240. s are run automatically if there is more than one input Maximum deviation The permissible deviation in percent between the two comparative values is to be entered here The termination quantity parameter defines the query limit Termination quantity Here a relative quantity is parameterized in m3 for the comparison to which a totalizer deviation between the two channels to be compared is related After this quantity has been reached the verification is performed and then the volume meter is reset and a new comparative cycle started Termination short If the last comparison has resulted in an alarm synchronous run can be tested with shorter cycles to observe the fault situation This enables the alarm to be cleared more quickly NOTE Do not select too small a value otherwise the quantity is too small to detect troublefree operation with the tolerance set maximum deviation Logic of synchronous run Monitoring of synchronous run is not only restricted to the comparison between Vo and HF input but verifies all combinations with more than one input signal The following table provides an overview of the functions in troublefree operation In the case of a fault the corrector uses the undisturbed signal or if there are three input signals it switches over to the relevant signal automatically Operating Fault Fault DZU HW SW Qm Vm kv mode Vo comp c
241. s coupler for Portugal resulting in the following register configuration aus Pm Value Value display modbus Register Bytes Datatype Line Group Name 9010 9012 9014 9016 9018 9020 9022 9024 9026 9028 9029 9030 9031 9032 9033 9034 9500 9502 9504 9506 9507 float IEEE 754 unsigned integer 32 bit unsigned integer 32 bit unsigned integer 32 bit unsigned integer 32 bit unsigned integer 32 bit unsigned integer 32 bit signed integer 32 bit signed integer 32 bit unsigned integer 16 bit unsigned integer 16 bit unsigned integer 16 bit unsigned integer 16 bit unsigned integer 16 bit unsigned integer 16 bit unsigned integer 16 bit float IEEE 754 float IEEE 754 float IEEE 754 unsigned integer 16 bit unsigned integer 16 bit R W R W R W R W R W AE LB LB LB LC LC LC FG FG YES KB KB KB KB KB KB 10 28 10 60 61 Standard density Totalizer AM 1 Totalizer AM 1 Totalizer AM 1 Disturbance totalizer AM1 Disturbance totalizer AM1 Disturbance totalizer AM1 Hardware test Hardware test Error reports Time output Time output Time output Time output Time output Time output Imp GC Modbus main Imp GC Modbus main Imp GC Modbus main Time input Time input Measurement variable Energy Corr vol meas Volumetric f
242. s telephone time service time has been detected If the message is considered an unwanted interruption it can be deactivated here IE 15 DSfG B IP state Indication of the state of the DSfG B IP machine Open Opens a TCP IP socket Listen State of the TCP IP socket is LISTEN waiting for a partner to dock Identification A partner has docked Stage 1 of the login procedure Identification Stage 2 of the login procedure Commands Stage 3 of the login procedure Transparent state Close TCP IP connection is cut at the ERZ end Closed TCP IP connection is cut at both ends IE 16 DSfG B IP port Port specification for DSfG B IP interface The internal device documentation contains a complete data element list for the remote data transfer entity of the ERZ 2000 see Documentation Il DSfG 1 Data elements c Remote data transfer G A 70 IF DSfG master Access Line Designation Value traditional E 3 ES IF 01 DSfG device Addresses of all devices on the DSfG bus Uppercase letters external addresses Lowercase letters internal addresses Devices located on the bus are displayed here even if the control station is not active 200 IF 02 General polling If the control station is active the general polling strategy is defined here Traditional General polling across all available devices takes place once every minute Floating General polling does not occur
243. sages bear the time stamps before and after the time is adjusted PTB s telephone time service time has been detected goes Carrier signal modem goes Identification The system waits for the bus identification query E 04 which forms phase 1 of the login procedure Identification The system waits for the identification E 05 which forms phase 2 of the login procedure Commands Identification E 05 is complete The system waits for commands which forms phase 3 of the login procedure The command for transparent switching has been detected The connection between the remote central exchange and local DSfG bus is established which forms phase 4 of the login procedure Hang up The telephone connection is terminated Wiring of ERZ2000 to modem All 9 wires must be connected one on one All other variants are unsuitable IE 04 Bus identification Step 1 of the login procedure via modem K command According to DSfG specifications the bus ID must be exactly 12 characters long The bus ID can also be modified via the modem IE 05 RDT ID Step 2 of the login procedure via modem I command According to DSfG specifications the ID must be exactly 16 characters long The ID can also be modified via the modem IE 06 Modem init string Initialization of the modem Refer to the documentation accompanying the modem for information on the meaning of the commands The default value ate0s0 1 is the minimum requirement that must be fulfilled f
244. seconde input value failed Extra analog value 1 second input value failed Extra analog value 2 first input valuer failed Extra analog value 2 below lower warning limit Extra analog value 2 exceeds upper warning limit Extra analog value 2 second input value failed Extra analog value 3 first input valuer failed Extra analog value 3 below lower warning limit Extra analog value 3 exceeds upper warning limit Extra analog value 3 second input value failed Extra analog value 4 first input valuer failed Extra analog value 4 below lower warning limit Extra analog value 4 exceeds upper warning limit Extra analog value 4 second input value failed Extra analog value 5 first input valuer failed Extra analog value 5 below lower warning limit Extra analog value 5 exceeds upper warning limit Extra analog value 5 second input value failed Extra analog value 6 first input valuer failed Extra analog value 6 below lower warning limit Extra analog value 6 exceeds upper warning limit Extra analog value 6 second input value failed Extra analog value 7 first input valuer failed Extra analog value 7 below lower warning limit Extra analog value 7 exceeds upper warning limit Extra analog value 7 second input value failed Extra analog value 8 first input valuer failed Extra analog value 8 below lower warning limit Extra analog value 8 exceeds upper warning limit Extra analog value 8 second input value failed Pulse output 1 overflow Pulse output 2 overflow Pulse o
245. ss Line Designation Value Unit D 1 Time last freezer 09 08 2010 10 53 10 D 2 Freeze contat OF Setting for all freeze parameters B 3 Freeze mode The freeze results then appear in the blue fields browser B 4 Freeze interval Source can be B 5 Source freeze cont Contact input 1 8 A 39 FD Corrector cycle Indicates the number of corrector cycles per second 20 cycles per second here Access Line Designation Value Unit Significance of the cycle brake There is a pause of n x 10 ms after each corrector cycle Here n 3 i e 30 ms pause after a 20 ms computing cycle which produces the 50 ms shown in the sum A 40 FE Calibration unit standard density gross calorific value Access Line Designation This function corresponds to the old FE 06 or the switch set for online calibration of the fuel gas value and standard density if these measurement variables are delivered by special sensors calorie meter with frequency or current output standard density from density sensor or scales There is no longer an interface for connecting an FE 06 170 A 41 FF Function test under running conditions Access Line Designation Value Unit Sufficient time must be allowed for the A rest functional test to produce meaningful values with a corresponding resolution 1 2 Time stamp 1 01 01 1970 0 Only a few minutes are required to
246. ssigned via software Signal input 5 to be assigned via software Signal input 5 to be assigned via software Signal input 6 to be assigned via software Signal input 6 to be assigned via software Signal input 7 spare for second volume input measuring channel Signal input 7 spare for second volume input measuring channel Signal input 8 spare for second volume input reference channel Signal input 8 spare for second volume input reference channel Volume input measuring channel HFX external isolation Volume input measuring channel HFX external isolation Volume input reference channel external isolation Volume input reference channel external isolation In the case of the ERZ 2002 2102 density corrector the frequency measuring card F 58 is used and X 9 is assigned X9 Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal O ON amp WN e Terminal Frequency 5 density to be assigned via software Frequency 5 density to be assigned via software Frequency 6 standard density to be assigned via software Frequency 6 standard density to be assigned via software Frequency 7 standard density to be assigned via software Frequency 7 standard density to be assigned via software Frequency 8 velocity of sound to be assigned via software Frequency 8 velocity of sound to be assigne
247. t 57 36 t CO2 TJ 157 D 10 COZEmission 129157 23 kg h D 11 Combusteirdry 851499 38 kg h D 12 Combusteirhum 853948 19 kg h A 22 DG Correction of velocity of sound Access Line Designation Value G 5 at base conditions Parameter for the density correction 53 3600 59 3500 341 1000 The assessed analysis calculates the correct gas composition from a few input variables provided by a correlative measuring device EMC 500 for example The calculation is consistent however there may be one or several other compositions that also deliver the same fuel gas value standard density etc A 23 DH Assessed analysis Designation Value Unit o o o ums 5 The settings in the Assessment base menu enable the selection of input variables for the assessed analysis wr pe 0 0 645772 0 109226 A 24 DI Adjustable extra base condition Access Line Designation Value Unit Unit Unlike the base condition settings for the correction other standard pressure and temperature values can be defined here and used to calculate a separate flow rate and density This menu is provided for subsequent upgrades and complete results under other standard conditions A 25 DJ Exhaust summary Access Line Designation Value Exhaust summary for the combustion of natural gas fuel gas with the supply of air Exhaust components originating from
248. t 1 Terminal Current output 2 Terminal Current output 2 Current output 3 Terminal Current output 3 Terminal Current output 4 Terminal Current output 4 118 Terminal Input for Vo with external isolating device 1 2 3 4 Terminal 5 6 7 8 9 1 Terminal 10 Input for Vo with external isolating device X5 Terminal Current input 1 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Terminal Current input 1 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Terminal Terminal Current input 2 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Current input 2 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Current input 3 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Terminal Current input 3 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Terminal PT 100 500 1000 1 supply standard connection Terminal PT 100 500 1000 1 sense standard connection Terminal PT 100 500 1000 1 sense standard connection 1 2 3 4 Terminal 5 6 7 8 9 1 Terminal 10 PT 100 500 1000 1 supply standard connection X6 Terminal 1 Current input 4 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Terminal 2 Current input 4 active or passive note the polarity see examples of connection Terminal 3 Current input 5 active or passive note the polarity see examples of c
249. t field in Q 24 DVm1 1 000000 ne the set list All totalizers in the totalizer set list with a negative value Q 25 DEI 1 000000 kWh explicitly 1 remain unchanged Q 26 1 000000 kg Q 27 DVb2 1 000000 Q 28 DVc2 1 000000 Q 29 DVm2 1 000000 30 DE2 1 000000 kWh 31 DM2 1 000000 Kg 32 DVb3 1 000000 33 DVc3 1 000000 m3 34 DVm3 1 000000 222 35 DE3 1 000000 kWh 36 DM3 1 000000 kg 37 DVb4 1 000000 m3 38 DVc4 1 000000 m3 iii 39 DVm4 1 000000 ms 40 DE4 1 000000 kWh 41 DM4 1 000000 m i 42 Controlcnt 1 1 000000 43 Controlcnt 2 1 000000 44 Controlent 1 000000 45 Controlcnt 4 1 000000 iii 46 Extracnt 1 1 000000 m3 47 Extracnt 2 1 000000 48 Extracnt 3 1 000000 oo 49 4 1 000000 50 Extracnt 5 1 000000 oo 51 Extracnt 6 1 000000 52 CO2 EM 1 1 000000 kg 53 02 2 1 000000 kg 54 CO2 EM 1 000000 kg iii 55 CO2 EM 4 1 000000 kg 56 Dist 2 1 1 000000 kg 57 Dist 2 2 1 000000 kg 58 Dist CO2 EM3 1 000000 kg cout cout Mua ous Mong cus Tee jii 59 Dist CO2 EM4 1 000000 kg A 90 15 Hourly quantities Access Line Designation Value Unit 32 Hour Vm fraction 294444 m3 33 Hour Vb fraction 229635 m3 34 HourEfractio
250. t time and the stop time Delay defines the delayed start Schedule enables time targets to be defined in advance by mouse click before loading them into the ERZ 2000 by pressing the Enter button The time of the PC connected is used as a basis for the time forerun tracking and the test time In order to ensure that the times set correspond to reality you have to synchronize the times of the PC and the ERZ beforehand It is not necessary to take account of the daylight saving time or summer 47 time shift of one hour since this is done automatically Using the FF 09 Partner address and FF 10 Partner entity coordinates in the case of meters being connected in series you can transmit the times defined for the functional test to a second ERZ 2000 the one connected in series and thus achieve a synchronous test sequence Transmission is performed using the DSfG bus 3 2 11 5 Hardware test Option for testing all inputs and outputs of the device If the function is set to Inactive the momentary status of the display the LEDs and the signal inputs and or outputs is shown while browsing If the function is set to Active the input or output displayed is affected while browsing E g the alarm contacts are operated and the current outputs are set to fixed values current output 1 to 10mA 2 to 11 mA 3 to 12mA 4 to 13mA and the pulse outputs are operated pulse output 1 with 1 pulse per sec 2 with 2 pulses per sec 3 with 3 pulses per s
251. t to half hour The following applies for the time contact options Synchronization occurs on the rising edge The polarity of the contact inputs can be modified with N704 Inverting mask The corrector time is adjusted to the nearest full half minute or full half hour depending on the setting A potential time synchronization via DSfG is ignored in these cases PTB time service If telephone access is available via a modem the time can be synchronized by calling the PTB time service The relevant telephone number must be entered in KC10 Phone Network time serv If a known time server is available synchronization can take place via the network However this is only recommen ded if there is no possibility of using the telephone PTB time service The following settings must be configured KC40 port 37 server IP address of the time server e g 192 53 103 104 corresponding to the internet address ptbtime2 ptb de of the PTB time server determine IP address with ping ptbtime2 ptb de KC41 port 37 protocol Connection type for the time server e g UDP for PTB time server A14 gateway IP address of the local gateway e g 192 168 20 254 for the standard gateway from RMG Beindersheim determine gateway address with ipconfig If an internet address is specified in KC40 port 37 server a domain name service must be activated to effect the change into an IP address A21 DNS IP address for Domain Name Service e g Telecom DNS Important note
252. t up warn lim Hexane l warn lim Hexane gt up warn lim Heptane lt l warn lim Heptane gt up war lim Octane l warn lim Octane gt up warn lim Nonane lt l warn lim Nonane gt up warn lim Decane lt l warn lim Decane gt up warn lim H2S I warn lim H2S gt up warn lim H20 I warn lim H20 gt up warn lim He l warn lim He gt up warn lim O2 I warn lim O2 up warn lim CO l warn lim CO gt up warn lim Ethene l warn lim Ethene gt up warn lim C3H6 I warn lim C3H6 gt up war lim Ar lt l warn lim Ar gt up warn lim RMGB missing RMGB param err DSfG param err TCPIP fault buggy software file system Path 8 loss Ethane below lower warning limit Ethane exceeds upper warning limit Propane below lower warning limit Propane exceeds upper warning limit N butane below lower warning limit N butane exceeds upper warning limit l butane below lower warning limit l butane exceeds upper warning limit N pentane below lower warning limit N pentane exceeds upper warning limit l pentane below lower warning limit l pentane exceeds upper warning limit Neo pentane below lower warning limit Neo pentane exceeds upper warning limit Hexane below lower warning limit Hexane exceeds upper warning limit Heptane below lower warning limit Heptane exceeds upper warning limit Octane below lower warning limit Octane exceeds upper warning limit Nonane below lower warning limit Nonane exceeds upper warning limit Decane below lower warning
253. ted inputs and outputs here The device only connects and activates the inputs and outputs defined here Do not modify the default settings of the quartz frequencies Enter the actual minimum and maximum values for the reference sources Important for calculating the linear equation Activate or deactivate this function Do not modify the references values for the temperature measurement Is normally deactivated Comparison between measured and calculated sound velocity Assignment of frequency inputs 1 and 5 Ex card Assignment of frequency inputs 2 and 6 Ex card Assignment of frequency inputs 3 and 7 Ex card B 38 Dead man button 10 Assignment of frequency inputs 4 and 8 Ex card B 39 use TIMER ISR no Assignment of the input for encoder totalizers Ex card Xt Activate the drag indicator for source value or base value A 34 EJ Identification of Software Access Line Designation Value Unit Activation key compatible with this software version See separate documentation at the end of this manual for a more detailed description In the event of a software update select YES here in superuser mode If a data book is created when operating a browser in the user visualization level the ERZ uses the parameters to generate a checksum The CRC binary code displayed in field 12 is used to periodically check the official kernel and the
254. thode E MoBstob ToleranzerGabe grob a3 E h DIN 7168 2009 Tog Nane Werkstoff Beorb 24 11 M Weber And Anderunas Tog None Gepr zust Mitteilung Norm Rosemount Me technik Sicherheitsmarken MeBumformer 3051 Baueinheiten Zertifikat Zeichnungs Nr EMERSON 8100 1330 Process Management ROSEMOUNT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen der Rosemount inc Ersatz f r Ersetzt durch 252
255. tion activated via the menu to be used for tests in the case of series connection totalizers are running and are marked in the archive output pulses stop Revision via contact Standard function activated via an external contact to be used for tests in the case of series connection totalizers are running and are marked in the archive output pulses stop The contact input to be used can be selected under ED Parameter access in line 12 Source revision contact Lines 13 14 and 15 define the behaviour of the device during revision 42 If you want the totalizers to stop during revision select At rest here If you want to retain the last valid measured Extract from the browser value for pressure or temperature during revision select Retained value here 3 2 6 4 Corrections according to GOST 8 586 Calculate temperature correction factors See GA dimensions Take roughness of tube into consideration See GX Roughness of tube Take abrasion of orifice into consideration See GY Abrasion of orifice 3 2 7 Information about pressure parameters The pressure input can be parameterized for 12 different operating modes OFF No measurement input is switched off Default No measurement fixed value from gauge pressure The value is derived from the gauge pressure sensor connected Measured value source value HART on 4 20 mA loop in combination with a current input Polynomial 1st order Coefficient O defines the polynomi
256. to Callendar van Dusen Measured value source value HART on 4 20 mA loop in combination with a current input Polynomial 1st order Coefficient O defines the polynomial Polynomial 2nd order Coefficients O and 1 define the polynomial Polynomial 3rd order Coefficients O 1 and 2 define the polynomial 4 20mA coefficient Coefficient O defines the min range coefficient 1 defines the max range 0 20mA coefficient Coefficient O defines the min range coefficient 1 defines the max range 4 20mA limit The min and max limits define the assignment of mA to temperature 0 20mA limit The min and max limits define the assignment of mA to temperature T DZU The temperature is measured by an ultrasonic measuring head USE 09 and transmitted via the DZU protocol Use the cursor key to browse to the Operating mode function Set the desired operating mode there after you have opened the calibration lock If the temperature sensor is to be operated using the HART protocol make sure that the operating mode is set to Measured value source value and a current input combined with the HART function is selected as source If the temperature sensor is operated as a transmitter make sure that its power supply is switched on in the associated menu of the current input The menu of the data sources comprises all metrological options of an input irrespective of whether or not these signals e g current or frequency signal analogous to the measured
257. totalizers can be changed in superuser mode Warning not only the unit is changed the historical counter readings are mixed with the new values and this cannot be reversed Access Line Designation Value Unit 218 Operating mode of the main totalizers in the event of a fault Stop main totalizer stops after an alarm Continue main totalizer continues to operate after an alarm in addition to the disturbance totalizers Checks the number of input pulses that have not yet been corrected and issues the message W05 7 Acc puls gt max if the maximum value is exceeded i e too many pulses stored in the cache with the calibration lock open LK26 Chan stat mode Calculation method for channel status of totalizers DSfG function There are two methods a RMG traditional and b New definition according to Ruhrgas with a the status of all stationary totalizers is stopped regardless of whether they are interrupted or another roadway is active Only operating totalizers have the status okay with b during normal operation the status of all disturbance totalizers is stopped and the status of all main totalizers is okay regardless of whether they are operating or another roadway is active In the event of a malfunction the status of all disturbance totalizers is okay and the status of all main totalizers is stopped regardless of whether they are operating or another roadway is active
258. tp param K3 outp param K4 outp param K5 outp param K6 outp param K7 outp param K8 outp param t gt sd corr time Rncorr signal Rncorr gt perm W t gt Hs corr time Hscorr signal Hscorr gt perm W Module 1A false Module 1B false Module 2A false Module 2B false Module 3A false Module 3B false DP 1 I 3mA DP2 I lt 3mA I lt 3mA Beta illegal DP 1 failure DP2 failure Current output 4 below minimum Current output 1 exceeds maximum Current output 2 exceeds maximum Current output 3 exceeds maximum Current output 4 exceeds maximum Namur module A analog digital converter Namur module A overload Namur module A open circuit PT100 Namur module A open circuit main channel Namur module A open circuit reference channel Namur module A open circuit ENCO Namur module B analog digital converter Namur module B overload Namur module B open circuit PT100 Namur module B open circuit main channel Namur module B open circuit reference channel Namur module B open circuit ENCO Current output 1 parameterization error Current output 2 parameterization error Current output 3 parameterization error Current output 4 parameterization error Contact output 1 parameterization error Contact output 2 parameterization error Contact output 3 parameterization error Contact output 4 parameterization error Contact output 5 parameterization error Contact output 6 parameterization error Contact output 7 parameterization error Contact output 8
259. trategy parameter at Differential pressure Note Access is only possible on the superuser level Example Current input 4 is to measure the small cell gt Chapter ND Current input 4 terminals X6 1 X6 2 In coordinate ND 09 there is the Measuring strategy parameter If the ERZ 2000 is operated as a volume corrector the default parameter is Standard If the ERZ 2000 is operated as an orifice plate flowcomputer you have to set this parameter at Differential pressure Repeat this setting for all current inputs selected for differential pressure measuring cells Please operate the inputs for pressure and temperature and all inputs which are not used for differential pressure measuring cells with the Standard setting To activate the HART operating mode of the differential pressure sensors please see the relevant information for pressure transmitters 3 2 6 1 Special case of the zero point adjustment of all differential pressure cells In its orifice plate flowcomputer mode the ERZ 2000 has a function to correct the offset at zero flow This enables the zero drift of the differential pressure cells to be adjusted easily Preconditions The ERZ 2000 is informed via contact input or Modbus register that the meter run is closed and the flow rate should be zero The differential pressure caused by a zero drift has to be lower than the value defined by the creeping quantity limit here coordinate AP 12 Zero point noise If the differential
260. tries at least with the user code If you select the Access chapter Revision mode will be the first function to appear Press Enter to switch to input mode the display will turn darker and then use the Cursor Up or Down key to change from operation to revision Press Enter again to terminate your inputs There are two revision modes which result in different operating modes in conjunction with the functions in coordinates ED 13 Total in revision Running At rest ED 14 Temp at revision Live value Retained value and ED 15 Press at revision Live value Retained value You can change coordinates ED 13 14 and 15 only after you have opened the official seal on the Superuser access level ED 01 Revision ED 13 Running gt To be used for tests with meters connected in series totalizers are running and are marked in the archive output pulses stop ED 14 Live value gt Temperature measurements continue to be taken for correction ED 15 Live value gt Pressure measurements continue to be taken for correction or ED 14 Retained value gt Temperature measurements are being retained for correction The measured value for revision can be seen in coordinate AC 24 base value ED 15 Retained value gt Pressure measurements are being retained for correction The measured value for revision can be seen in coordinate AB 24 base value ED 01 Revision ED 13 At rest gt To be used for tests in the case of simulation
261. ts are normally described in detail in the online documentation of the device The specific information can be viewed via the network interface using the browser by clicking on the name of the variable concerned The CA Overview column for analyses will change its appearance as soon as the GC 6000 has been configured Archive QH AG8 GC6000 GQ Archive group 8 is a DSfG archive which can be read remotely from a DSfG central station It contains data of gas analyses imported via GC 6000 or RMG bus and several characteristic PGC values as well as time stamps and running numbers This archive is located under Q Archives in coordinate QH The fastest way to access it on the device is by pressing the Archive key Long term archive GC6000 The long term archive is located on the internal memory card It replaces an external data memory which was previously assigned to the PGC It contains the data from gas analyses the most important characteristic values and statuses of the GC 6000 as well as time stamps and running numbers The long term archive is located outside the regular coordinate system downstream of the Q Archives area and upstream of the Documentation area It can be read out only via the network interface using the browser There are the following criteria for access Year Month Measured data day month year or calibration data month year 4 GC 6000 4 3 Installation of the expansion module Position the module
262. ture exceeds upper alarm limit Temperature gradient exceeds maximum Loss of VOS temperature VOS temperature below lower alarm limit VOS temperature exceeds upper alarm limit VOS temperature gradient exceeds maximum Loss of density transmitter temperature Density transmitter temperature below lower alarm limit Density transmitter temperature exceeds upper alarm limit Density transmitter temperature gradient exceeds maximum Loss of absolute pressure Absolute pressure below lower alarm limit Absolute pressure exceeds upper alarm limit Absolute pressure gradient exceeds maximum Loss of standard density Standard density below lower alarm limit Standard density exceeds upper alarm limit Standard density gradient exceeds maximum Hardware pulse comparison has taken effect Loss of density Density below lower alarm limit Density exceeds upper alarm limit Density gradient exceeds maximum Incorrect density calculation Vo failure effect of fault alarm Loss of superior calorific value Superior calorific value below lower alarm limit Superior calorific value exceeds upper alarm limit Superior calorific value gradient exceeds maximum Loss of carbon dioxide Carbon dioxide below lower alarm limit Carbon dioxide exceeds upper alarm limit Carbon dioxide gradient exceeds maximum Loss of VSM VSM below lower alarm limit VSM exceeds upper alarm limit VSM gradient exceeds maximum Loss of hydrogen Hydrogen below lower alarm limit Hydrogen
263. ty and 1 stop bit From these characters data frames are formed which are structured as follows Start character US Data character separated in part by US FS lt gt lt CR gt lt LF gt All lower case letters from a to z are used as start characters US separates the start character from the following data characters FS closes up the data frame as an end mark lt BCC gt is the block check character It is formed from incl start character up to incl FS as even horizontal parity over the data bits 0 to 6 and adds what is necessary for even character parity CR and lt LF gt are used to clearly separate subsequent data frames The size of a data frame from incl start character to incl LF is a maximum of 64 characters Layers 3 to 6 n a Layer 7 processing layer The following data frames have been specified up to now Data frame a Totalizer reading obligatory Contents Meaning a US Start character lower case letter a data frame identifier Totalizer reading 77777777 US Totalizer reading max 14 char as ASCII decimal no suppression of preceding zeros ww US Value of the totalizer reading max 2 characters optional sign or and decimal power as ASCII decimal eee lt US gt Unit of the totalizer reading max 3 characters as text field s lt FS gt Totalizer status exactly 1 byte range of val
264. ty corrector Date 21 0206 m with ET 2000 data logger and WBZ 08 vortex meter TRZ 03 turbine meter USZ 08 ultrasonic flowmeter 244 ANNEX 245 FLOW COMPUTER SYSTEM ERZ 2000 O Power O Run O Warn O Alarm Locking seal wire seal Meas PTT PQRS f Totalizer ABC 2 Analysis TUV 8 JKL 4 5 Archive Select Alarms Clear Flow computer ERZ 2102 Ser No Year 1 01325 bar 0 C Rig Further data press butt RMG MESSTECHNIK GMBH Germany Data logger ET2000 Ser No Press function button 5 Archive Back with any button Main seal Vortex gas meter type WBZ 08 7 222 Ser No 80 02 Turbine gas meter type TRZ 03 E 7 211 Ser No 80 03 Ultrasonic gas meter type USZ 08 7 241 Ser No 01 04 RMG MESSTECHNIK GMBH Front panel with main plate main seal and seal diagram ERZ 2102 superior calorific value corrector with direct density measurements with ET 2000 data logger and WBZ 08 vortex meter TRZ 03 E turbine meter or USZ 08 ultrasonic flowmeter Z Nr 059092 4 gez Ram Date 02 06 06 gepr Status 03 07 06 ANNEX Locking Seal Legend A 7 Locking seal cover B Locking seal base plate Cover installed as base plate rotated by 180 View simplified from the right
265. uded in the reply to the standard query the physically meaningless value 1 appears here After MAINS ON with setting Start with fault an alarm will be generated in the calibration phase It will disappear as soon as there are valid gas quality data available DSfG address for the leading DSfG gas quality sensor Available settings autodetect G entity Q entity 202 DSfG address for the redundant DSfG gas quality sensor In the event of a revision calibration or ref gas either remain with the leading GOM device or change to the redundant GOM device Maximum waiting time for GOM replies Maximum number of repeat requests Specifies whether the leading or redundant gas quality sensor is used for the current the bit string Q 48 GQM1 ignore time 0 min P 49 2 ignore time If the setting yes is selected PGC alarms B 51 VNG mode Em no have no effect in the corrector IG 37 Query Defines the data content in the DSfG request to the gas quality measuring device The AGA8 compatible query retrieves the full analysis in addition to basic quality values Standard query dlc for traditional gas quality Standard query 11 5 qje for gas quality Il The GERG compatible query only retrieves basic quality values Standard query 2 dib for traditional gas quality Standard query 1 2 qib for gas quality Il Warning The AGA8 compatible query does not conta
266. ue Hs last hour Energy quantity last hour LSO4 LS14 20 MWh 0 264351 MWh 20 264351 MWh Volume at base conditions last hour LS03 LS13 1831 m3 0 534674 m3 1831 534674 m3 Hs last hour 20264 351 KWh 1831 534674 m3 11 0642 KWh m3 A 93 Current output 1 terminal X4 1 X4 2 Access Line Designation Value Unit D A converter value 4BE2 hex Vol flow rate meas j Extended assignm edit o m3 h 19 4 5 Assignment 6 7 Lower mapping 8 Upper mapping 9 Averaging factor 10 Operating mode 11 Operation if fault 12 Rise decr w fault 0 4 000 4 000 13 Default current 14 Test current Energy quantity last hour Volume at base conditions last hour Represents all current outputs Main selection for measured variable The values most frequently used for the current output are listed here If you wish to output a different measurement variable to the one listed here program Extended selection and then set the measurement variable using the function in line 6 Defines the operating mode in the event of a fault Preset fault operating mode rise If the output physical variable extends beyond the display range the output current is increased or decreased by the value programmed here ee gt 20 090 Output current 1 method 17 Method In line 6 Extended assignm you have the opti
267. uency 80499 one of the measurement variables available for selection here or with extended options to the variable that was selected in line 6 T e S Available operating modes include off 0 1000Hz 0 2000Hz 0 2500Hz default and test frequency The setpoint of the frequency is entered here in Default operating mode The setpoint of the frequency is entered here in Test frequency operating mode The actual value of the frequency output and the deviation from the setpoint are displayed here 19 Act Frequency 80 499 H A deviation may occur if the setpoint cannot be displayed without the internal binary divider using a fraction The function of the frequency output is an auxiliary function for cases where the flow corrector is also the main totalizer for a connected ultrasound meter The ultrasound gas meter requires a frequency signal for preliminary testing calibration bench testing This signal is used for comparison with a reference device An alternative more modern method would be to transfer the current values using the MODBUS A 97 Current input 1 terminal X5 1 X5 2 Access Line Designation Vlaue Unit NIU UE Represents all current outputs 230 5 Converter value FFFFFFDC hex Displays which function uses this measured value i e the beneficiary the absolute pressure in this case J 17 HART unit code 0 J 18 HART Manufact Code 0 J 19 HART Type code 0
268. ues 0x30 to Ox3F 0x30 means no fault 8 CHARACTERISTIC DATA Comments 1 The values of 0 0 and 0 are equivalent and therefore also permissible 2 Typically the unit for the totalizer reading used is m3 Other volume or mass units are also permissible 3 The totalizer status allows for four fault messages which are independent of each other Faultless totalizer readings are to be expected for the end device only if status 0x30 Data frame b ID display optional Contents Meaning b US Start character lower case letter b data frame identifier ID display HHH US Manufacturer code exactly 3 characters upper case letters TTTTT US Device type meter size max 6 characters SSSSSSSS US Factory serial number of the meter max 9 characters JJJJ US Year of construction of the meter exactly 4 characters as ASCII decimal VVVV FS Software version number of the electronics max 4 characters Comments e manufacturer code consists of the first three letters of the company name listed in the Commercial Register e The fields are declared as free text fields which are for information only e range of values extends from 19 50 to 20 49 To maintain the connection between the primary device and the end device the specification requires that at least one data frame per second is exchanged on layer 2 In each case the Totalizer reading data frame a has p
269. ure exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization gauge pressure Loss of nitrogen Nitrogen below lower alarm limit Nitrogen exceeds upper alarm limit Nitrogen gradient exceeds maximum Nitrogen below lower warning limit Nitrogen exceeds upper warning limit Inconsistent parameterization nitrogen Dynamic memory allocation error CAN bus malfunction CAN bus overflow Failure of the billing mode signal Official character of custody transfer GC data violated GC communications disturbed GC communications disturbed Device is overheated Device is undercooled Van der Waals iteration is running amok Undefinied billing mode Billing mode 1 Billing mode 2 Billing mode 3 Billing mode 4 archive entry because attention f freeze on DSfG Oven temperature extremely high Carrier gas pressure error Response Factor error Chromatogram baseline error Oven temperature error Carrier gas pressure out of control Chromatogram peak height over the measurement range HGC overhaul time Total raw error Retention time lock error Auto calibration Fieldwork Hexane PV 1 high low alarm N N NY NN NY YN YN KH a a HS HNN NY KH H H NY HS H NNN NNNNNN NNN Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 103 9 FAULT NUMB
270. ure sensor have to be entered in the Pressure chapter while those of the temperature sensor have to be entered in the Temperature chapter etc 46 F 3 2 11 Information about test functions Under the lt 6 gt Test key all chapters and functions for checking the device are combined There are the following functions On the fly calibration Freeze Computing cycle Calibration Rhon Hs Functional test Hardware test Ultrasonic diagnosis and Test cabinet internal 3 2 11 1 X On the fly calibration If you have selected the On the fly calibration function you can start this function by pressing Enter All totalizers are displayed in high resolution together with a stopwatch If you press Enter again the totalizers and the stopwatch will be stopped If you press Enter once again all values will be reset to zero and the procedure will be restarted 3 2 11 2 Freeze If manual freeze has been set in Freeze mode a freeze procedure is started every time the Test key is pressed All values marked F are stored synchronously when the Test key is pressed The measured values stored will be retained until the next freeze procedure is initiated The following freeze modes are possible OFF Manual Contact Cyclic Gas day Every day Every hour Every second Every minute DSfG For the Cyclic operating mode it is possible to set the interval 3 2 11 3 Calibration standard density superior calorific value Formation of correct
271. uring the check you can see the maximum value which is being stored at the moment the time stamp associated with this maximum value If you increase the flow rate the maximum value display will start to run as soon as the quantity is higher than the previously stored value Also the time display time stamp will start to run At the end of the minute the value will be stored and will remain stable until a new higher value is detected If you reduce the flow rate again the value stored will remain unchanged To view the storage procedure repeatedly you can reset the memory contents manually At the end of hour an automatic reset will be made 3 11 Environment DF Impact on the environment in the case of complete combustion The water and CO2 produced during combustion as well as the emission factor are displayed DJ Exhaust summary The contents of the constituents being combusted and their sum in the exhaust fumes are displayed DK Composition of exhaust fumes Presentation of emission values All the four billing modes have been expanded 4 sets of totalizers in connection with the calculation of emission values There are CO2 totalizers in each of the four billing modes directions In the case of the parameters of the pulse outputs it is also possible to select a CO2 totalizer as source for pulse outputs 4 GC 6000 4 GC 6000 4 1 Overview The ERZ 2000 can be fitted with an expansion module for connecting a
272. utput 3 overflow Pulse output 4 overflow Current output 1 below minimum Current output 2 below minimum Current output 3 below minimum N N NN NYY NN NNN NNN NN NY NNN NNN NN NN NY NY NY YM n No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 FAULT NUMBERS FAULT TEXTS 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt BBA BA BAA A AA A gt 4o X Pr PrP ISI I SOIL OL Sse Be Se gt SST OIL OI 70 9 71 0 71 1 71 2 71 3 71 4 71 5 71 6 71 7 71 8 71 9 72 0 72 1 72 2 72 3 72 4 72 5 73 0 73 1 73 2 73 3 74 0 74 1 74 2 74 3 74 4 74 5 74 6 74 7 75 0 75 1 75 2 75 3 75 4 75 5 76 0 76 1 76 2 76 3 76 4 76 5 77 0 77 1 77 2 77 3 77 4 77 5 14 outp lt min 11 outp gt max 12 outp gt max I3 outp gt max 14 outp gt max NMA ADC NMA overload NMA OC PT100 NMA OC mainch NMA OC ref ch NMA OC ENCO NMB ADC NMB overload NMB OC PT100 NMB OC Messk NMB OC Vgl k NMB OC ENCO 11 outp param 12 outp param I3 outp param 14 outp param K1 outp param K2 ou
273. w lower alarm limit Methane exceeds upper alarm limit Methane gradient exceeds maximum Error occurred during normalization of gas components No more signal from methane transmitter GC reports loss of methane Error during VOS correction calculation AGA 8 algorithmic error AGA 8 92DC algorithmic error Gbh Gbh Gbh Gbh Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Vn Gbh Gbh Gbh Gbh Vn Gbh Gbh Gbh Vn Vn Vn Group Designation Value display Value Modbus EGO Modbus Counter Vb 997972 m3 00 OF 3A 54 EGO Modbus Counter Vm 20421 m3 00 00 4F C5 EGO Modbus Counter energy 9710 MWh 00 00 25 EE EGO Modbus Disturbcnt Vb 39597 m3 00 00 9A AD EGO Modbus Disturbcnt Vm 823 m3 00 00 03 37 EGO Modbus Disturbcnt energy 389 MWh 00 00 01 85 EGO Modbus Flow Ob 12550 39 m3 h 46 44 19 8E EGO Modbus Flow Qm 190 910 m3 h 43 3E E9 09 EGO Modbus Flow Oe 125503 9kW 47 F5 1F F2 EGO Modbus Standard density EGO Modbus Gross cal val 0 8000 kg m3 3F 4C CC CD 10 000 kWh m3 41 20 00 00 EGO Modbus Hydrogen 0 000 mole 00 00 00 00 EGO Modbus Carbon dioxide 6 067 mole 40 C2 21 10 EGO Modbus Oper density 52 592 kg m3 42 52 5D F9 EGO Modbus Abs pressure 54 773 bar 42 5B 17 84 EGO Modbus Temperature 10 00 C C1 20 00 00 EGO Modbus Alarm 0 00 00 89 6 MODBUS Important issues e The ERZ 2000 is a Modbus slave e Supported function codes 03 Read holding register To read data 16 Preset multiple registers To write data e The reg
274. which represents the central functional module of the ERZ 2000 consists of a powerful microprocessor system based on an AMD 586 with an associated program memory flash memory random access memory and data memory The random access memory contains the variables fields buffers etc required for running the system software and the changeable device parameters of all functional modules The device parameters are protected by means of a checksum which is automatically verified with each new start of the device The program memory contains the operating program of the device A CRC checksum has been calculated via the source code and deposited as reference value The correctness of the checksum can be verified under Software ID in the coordinates of column EJ Front panel with Rear panel controls with all inputs Arithmetic logic unit ALU and outputs Base module jo Figure 1 Overview of the system structure internal bus 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 Field of application The general field of application includes the recording and metering of quantities in natural gas flow measurement technology for custody transfer applications In special cases there are also equation systems available for measuring pure industrial gases for example Depending on the software installed the device can be supplied as e PTZ corrector for natural gases 2 Calculation of the K coefficient in accordance with GERG 88 S AGA NX 19 or AGA 8 92DC
275. without fraction To select the unit there are texts and conversion functions available for each totalizer For metering large quantities you can change the representation mode of totalizers from 9 to 14 digits plus 3 decimal places The 9 or 14 digit representation mode will be active for all totalizers at the same time and can be selected via the LK29 No of digits parameter Note As soon as the new unit is set the totalizer increments are calculated with the new unit and added to the previous totalizer reading thus mixed values are formed In addition it is also possible to shift the decimal separator and select Totalizer reading mode 10 100 1000 m3 Example 1 You want to select another unit for the Vb totalizer Press 7 Totalizer and use the lt gt Select key to switch to the chapter which is currently selected In this case the Totalizers chapter will be displayed as current chapter Now use the Cursor Down key to browse to the Totalizer parameters chapter and press Enter Browse until you reach the LKO6 Vol base unit parameter and set the desired unit there Example 2 You want all totalizers to run with 14 digits Press 7 Totalizer and use the lt gt Select key to switch to the chapter which is currently selected In this case the Totalizers chapter will be displayed as current chapter Now use the Cursor Down key to browse to the Totalizer parameters chapter and press Enter Browse until you reach the LK2
276. y and is then stopped group 3 2 12 3 Other outputs Similar to this are the Contact outputs 1 to 8 and Frequency output 1 chapters 3 2 12 4 Inputs Press 4 O and the Cursor Right key to reach the Current inputs 1 to 8 Resistance inputs 1 amp 2 Frequency inputs 1 to 8 and Contact inputs chapters There all important values for parameterization and display are combined By using the relevant features all appropriate data calculated values etc can be selected 3 OPERATING THE GAS VOLUME CORRECTOR 3 2 12 5 Extra analog values From software version 1 3 functions can be assigned to unassigned inputs and the measured values can be written in archives DSfG archive 10 For each input the function can be selected similarly to the standard inputs for pressure or temperature It is also possible to define limits and values For each measured value there is an input field where a name can be entered The extra analog values can be found under the Miscellaneous heading in section O from coordinate OF See chapter 3 4 1 49 3 2 13 Revision switch Function of the revision switch If the revision switch is switched on the pulse outputs of the corrector are switched off In addition the revision bit is activated in the data records from the DSfG interface You can activate the revision switch by selecting an operating mode under the 0 Mode key in the Access chapter Before you activate the revision switch you have to enable en

ERZ 2000 Operating Instructions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents